Home

EDIT/1000 User`s Manual

1. Figure 4 3 B Find a Pattern Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 5 BC Block Copy Uses Use to copy a rectangle of text from one area to another area in the work file This command enables cut and paste editing Command 1 BC 1 256 1 Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 BC startcol stopcol destcol Q Syntax linespec 1 linespec2 Optional line range that indicates height of rectangle to be copied If no line range is specified BC copies only the line above the current pending See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications startcol stopcol Starting and stopping column numbers for the block copy Indicates width of rectangle to be copied Stop column is optional If omitted it defaults to last column determined by length of the line on a line by line basis If both start and stop columns are included they must be separated by a colon destcol Optional destination column for placement of the copied block Along with the pending line this parameter defines the upper left corner of the destination If omitted text is copied to the end of the destination line current pending line Q Optional Enter the Quiet command to suppress a listing of the copied block Remarks The text from the source area overwrites the text at the destination The BC command should be executed from the line where you wish the fir
2. 008 4 31 I Insert Line Command Example osito ias 4 33 J Join Lines Command Example van viwrstas tie dees aa tae ves TRS Ss 4 34 K Kill Lines Command Examples 00 00 c cess eee ee eee 4 37 Kx Mark a Line Command Examples 000 000000 4 39 L List Command Examples ojo ian aes See wes vanes 4 42 LE Line Length Command Example 0 000000 4 43 LI List Lines in File Command Example 0 000 4 44 M Merge Command Example 0 e cece eee 4 50 MO Move Command Example 0 eee cece eee eee 4 52 N Display Line Number Command Example 0 4 53 n Specific Line Number Command Example 4 54 RU Run Program Command Examples 00 eee 4 60 S Screen Mode Edit Command Example 0 000 4 67 SC Screen Copy Command Example 20 esse ee eee 4 68 SE Set Option Command Example 0 cece eee ee ee 4 69 SH Show Options Command Example 2 sees eee 4 73 SZ Check File Size Command Examples 0000000005 4 74 T Set Tabs Command Examples 6 li Cos saat tee ws oe eats 4 76 TI Time Command Example 2 0522 A a et o tak 4 77 TK Tab Kill Command Example 2 00 co6 cess eda ee eae ee or ee 4 78 TR Transfer Command Example 0 0 cee eee eee ee 4 80 U Unconditional Exchange Command Examples
3. 4 82 UN Undo Command Examples ic 6 icons cin te ie ee ees 4 83 UY Undo List Yank Command Example 00000 4 84 W List Window Command Example 0000 c eee eee 4 85 WC Create File without Exit Command Examples 4 86 WR Write and Replace Command Examples 04 4 87 X Exchange Command Examples oes ois AS 4 89 Y Exchange and Search Command Example 0 4 91 Sequence Numbers Command Example 4 93 Online Quick Reference Command Example 4 94 Display Source File Status Command Examples 4 95 Command Stack Command Example o o oooocccccccccco co 4 96 lt space gt Append a Line Command Example 4 97 _ Repeat Command Example e citan baa ee eee ace eee eee ees 4 99 _ Repeat Command Example ii ida 4 99 Comment Command Example oooooccccccccccccccccccc co 4 100 Example of Literal Matching usa ds di ees 5 4 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x y 5 7 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy 5 8 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy with WC 6 5 8 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy 5 9 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy with WC 1 10 5 10 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x y 5 1
4. Figure 4 15 FI File Input Command Example 4 22 EDIT 1000 Commands FL Fill Uses Command Syntax The Fill command FL is used to fill text to the margins set with the SE FL command and displayed with the SH FL command The lt first gt column is the left fill margin the lt last gt column is the right fill margin and the lt end gt column is the last column from which to gather text Over the range of lines specified this command attempts to fill each line between the fill margins Lines that are too long will have their ending words moved to the next line Lines that are too short will be made longer if possible by moving up words from the following lines Paragraph breaks are indicated by lines that are blank between the lt first gt column and the lt end gt column inclusive The first and last line of the line specification are also treated as a paragraph break The first word of a paragraph may be indented Setting fill indentation on see the SH IN command keeps the Fill command from moving the first word of a paragraph It starts the fill after the first blank following the first non blank character in the paragraph Indentation may be either positive or negative The Fill command will put one blank between words except in the case where sentence ending punctuation is followed by a capital letter in which case two blanks are inserted The punctuation and capital letter will be seen
5. 00 eee eee 4 14 EC Exit and Create File Command Examples 4 15 ER Exit and Replace File Command Examples 4 17 F Find a Pattern Command Examples 000000005 4 19 FCL File Close List Command Example 005 4 20 FCS File Close Source Command Example 05 4 21 FI File Input Command Example 0 eee eee eee 4 22 Box Betore Using Fill TA 4 24 Example of Fill OSUNA ey ake 4 24 Box Atter Using Fill tara pea kOe 4 25 G Character Exchange on Pending Line Command Examples 4 27 EDIT Online Quick Reference Summary Menu 4 29 H Help Command Examples rol barda rra it oes 4 30 12 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 4 33 Figure 4 34 Figure 4 35 Figure 4 36 Figure 4 37 Figure 4 38 Figure 4 39 Figure 4 40 Figure 4 41 Figure 4 42 Figure 4 43 Figure 4 44 Figure 4 45 Figure 4 46 Figure 4 47 Figure 4 48 Figure 4 49 Figure 4 50 Figure 4 51 Figure 4 52 Figure 4 53 Figure 4 54 Figure 4 55 Figure 4 56 Figure 4 57 Figure 4 58 Figure 4 59 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 HL Header Line Command Example
6. 2 EDIT on LEMON HERMAN 4 1 8 closed Figure 4 14 FCS File Close Source Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 21 FI File Input Uses Use to replace the current EDIT work file with another file allowing you to edit a new file without aborting or exiting the editor Command FI lt filedescriptor gt Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Enter the filename descriptor to be assigned to the new file Refer to section in Chapter 1 on filename specification Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK prompt that is displayed if the current file that is the file that will be closed as a result of the FI command has been modified since the last save Remarks FI does not update the current EDIT source file If previous edits are to be saved be sure to use the WR or WC command prior to using FI The OK prompt is displayed if changes have been made to the current work file The FI command sets the default filename Examples Figure 4 15 illustrates the use of the FI command to input the file ZOO after making modifications to the original source file LEMON the SH Show command to check the default source file and the Display Source File Status command to find out what is currently being edited EOS OK y Closed file LEMON HERMAN 4 24 32 Opened file ZOO HERMAN 4 24 20 First lin ERMAN 24 20 2 EDIT on Z00 HERMAN 24 20
7. List file D or line spec pattern X or Y match X or Y substitute modified flag on Number of marks haracter Tab columns Global Option Settings tab cntl I 7 21 Search window columns 1 256 Vertical window Screen defaults 10 10 10 10 2 Fill cols first last end 1 70 256 Save Indentation on fill ax screen mode lines SL Regular expressions Return to dot if no match Indefinite character Screen mode display functs DE Prompt character Time stamp lt YYMMDD HHMM gt Command separator Control D mode ax screen width Line length Anchor character Escape character Figure 3 3 Example of Display for Show SH Command Set Options You may also check the setting for a specific option by entering the SH command for that option For example sn ze Regular expressions RE off The SE Set command is used to set the options Those options that are characters as opposed to ON OFF settings and numeric entries can be set to any non alpha non numeric printing character other than a space or a comma The listing below provides some examples note that the default value for each option being changed is included in parentheses If a Set command is entered without an option value EDIT applies the default value For ON OFF options the default value is the opposite of the current value that is the value is toggled each time the Set comman
8. 2 cee eee eee eee eee 3 22 Pattern Specification Shortcuts dd ees 3 23 Search and Exchange Command Options 2 cess eee eee eee eee enee 3 24 EDIT SESSION Options A Reale wore a ac a 3 25 VIEW OPOSITORES a ee eee eee 3 29 DEL CIP UO Utils 4 5 ott ee Bly tt go be Shere aie Oty Gia meee Geely ores ba ly eae Sasa 3 29 Etre Mode EI a Rd o ee o genes eee og te 3 31 Line Character Edits aa it AAA AE AT EEE E EEE A 3 31 Line Character Mod s aaa neie san AA CEG EER EGRE EERE ee EA 3 31 Additional Character Edits 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece e eee eee eee ens 3 32 Line Character Edit Examples jo saa 0 sch ahve do KAORI ING GE SRR 3 33 Screen Mode Editing sre ciro corecti cho AGORA GUNES TS ORGS ROS A Sy 3 34 Screen Display a nisi wate elses Aw oud ak Med Gide no od ate wee Rw See 3 35 Saving or Ignoring Screen Edits lt m s tes 3 36 Line Commands from Screen Mode mevvicorisnia sete a a e oes 3 36 Editing A O ae oe 3 36 Screen Mode Control Key Commands ocorciosintrcs coso ee oe eee 3 37 Screen Mode Error Message cronos prrur rr Ue 3 42 Es ECU A A A AA Ras 3 42 Exiting Screen MONG a a ae are 3 42 PA AAA RA A IS A oan e nee la EAA 3 43 Error and Information Messages 30 54 is4 5a pee does 50 Oe ea Re daa ae WSS ou Be eS 3 45 Recover from ETOS arras hare RORY e E a n hee eee 3 46 User EVES heege ie pa aga wey aay ne ag age a Owe ety A a ad ds 3 46 Br ak M ge 0 A A AA A Gold Rah garde Seba 3 46 Systemi ETOS A AI AAA 3 46 ECU
9. If you insert more than 24 consecutive blank lines EDIT may display a screen error message indicating that it could not locate the bottom screen bracket when the reading the new screen see Screen Mode Error Message which follows If you must have more than 24 consecutive blank lines in your file insert the character space on each line Sixteen control key command combinations are available on all terminals that support screen mode Q U P R E S T X C O K A Z J B and D To enter these commands press and hold the CTRL key press the alphabetic key release both keys then press the carriage return Most of the control commands save new edits when they are executed To execute the command but ignore new edits double the command For example CTRL U quits screen mode saving new edits whereas CTRL U CTRL U quits screen mode and ignores any edits made since the last screen save It is possible to cancel a control key combination that you entered but do not wish executed if you press some other printing character or non command key PRIOR to pressing the carriage return Moves the cursor to the first character on the line Also allows you to reset margins set through local terminal keys back to the initial terminal setting Moves cursor to last character on the line Also resets margins see CTRL A If a line is longer than 78 characters CTRL Z moves the cursor to the last character of the line whether that charac
10. CI gt edhte s chines ota EDIT 1000 Operations 3 47 Security Recovery Mode Messages 3 48 EDIT 1000 Operations EDIT responds to this command by displaying the directory that the file will be placed in followed by the full file descriptor The following message indicates that EDIT has run out of space for the work file OUT OF DISK WORK SPACE When this message is displayed no additional changes are allowed to your work file If the message is displayed while your file is being read you should abort EDIT Otherwise use an ER or EC to save your work and exit EDIT If you run out of work space and have sufficient space in a directory other than the default directory you can place the work file on another storage disk or directory For example to place the work file on directory EK enter CI gt edit s ek lt filename gt In this example upon any abnormal EDIT termination the work file remains on directory EK The next time EDIT is run it goes to the default work area disk to open a work file and because the file is on a different disk does not enter the recovery mode If the system crashes or EDIT is abnormally terminated the work file is accessible to any user on the system the next time an editing session is started If you are editing a file for which security is imperative use the S option in the EDIT runstring to specify a private directory for residence of the work file If the system crashes du
11. Informational message displayed in response to the command and the SH ER Show Exit and Replace option command after an FCS Close Source File command has been used to close the source file At this point EDIT will not allow the use of an ER Exit and Replace or WR Write and Replace command until the source file has been re opened None required Error and Information Messages A 3 Message EDIT on lt filename gt to be created Cause Informational message displayed in response to the command and the SH ER Show Exit and Replace option command Indicates that the current work file does not yet have a source file and that the use of an Exit ER command or a Write and Replace WR command will create the source file Action None required Message EDIT aborted Cause Informational message displayed when EDIT aborts as a result of an internal error Preceded by a message indicating the reason for the abort Action Contact your HP representative Message EDIT aborted by user Cause Informational message displayed when EDIT has been aborted Abort command by the user Action None required Message EDIT Use for help Cause Informational message displayed when the EDIT program is accessed Action None required Message end of edit Cause Informational message displayed in response to an EC Exit and Create or ER Exit and Replace command Action None required Message Entering recover mode Cause Inform
12. DA A display of the EDIT date code AB A listing of the EDIT abort messages RO A description of EDIT s runstring options Exiting EDIT The MORE feature permits help information to be displayed one screen at a time Pressing the letter a aborts the listing pressing the return key displays the rest of the current help message without pausing Pressing any other key causes the next screen to be displayed There are three commands used to exit an EDIT session Two of the commands exit the EDIT program saving the work done during the editing session and the third command exits EDIT without saving the work done during the editing session e EC Exit and Create which uses the information in the work file to create a new source file and then purges the work file e FR Exit and Replace which uses the information in the work file to write over replace the original source file from which the work file copy was made The work file is then purged e A Abort which aborts the EDIT session and discards the data entered or changes made to the work file Note that a fourth command AS Abort and Save Work File is used to temporarily save the work file This command is rarely used and is described under the System Errors section in Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Basics 1 7 Overview of EDIT Operations The EDIT Work File 1 8 EDIT 1000 Basics To take full advantage of the capabilities of the EDIT program it is i
13. JOY00001 JOY00002 JOY00003 JOY00004 Figure 4 52 Sequence Numbers Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 93 Online Quick Reference Uses Used to access the online quick reference or Help for any EDIT 1000 command or option Command command or option Syntax Remarks This command is identical to the H Help command For more information refer to the detailed description under mnemonic command H Examples RER H command or command Help H or without specifying a command lists all commands 2 gives the current Edit session and source filename Figure 4 53 Online Quick Reference Command Example 4 94 EDIT 1000 Commands Display Source File Status Uses Used to display the name version of the EDIT program source file being edited and the action an ER command performs Command 2 Syntax Remarks If the source file is closed FCS or will be created this state is also reported Examples EWCHAPTER HERMAN 4 960 44 on XYZ HERMAN 4 960 44 to be created on WORT xx closed Figure 4 54 Display Source File Status Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 95 Command Stack Uses Used to display last 20 commands entered during EDIT session Listed commands can then be edited and re executed by placing the cursor on the desired command and pressing the carriage return Command Syntax in or 0 n Optional
14. The Dot The dot character is used with Regular Expressions enabled ON Character as a single character wild card When this character is included in a pattern any single text character located in the dot s position is matched For example the command F x y matches the boxed items in the following text XY Figure 5 2 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x y Before this pattern matches text there must be a group of three characters on a line The first character in the group must be an X and the third must be a Y However the center character can be any character The preceding example shows that the dot metacharacter matches the character dot the character plus the character space and the letters Z and a The last line does not match because there is no character between the X and Y The Beginning The caret is used to anchor a search to the beginning of a line Anchor Character or search window To anchor a pattern the caret must be the first A character in the pattern If the caret occurs in some other position of the pattern it becomes a literal caret or a character class negation see section following EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 7 The simplest use of the beginning anchor character is to start a pattern search at the beginning of each line For example the command F xyzzy matches the boxed items in the following text abcd xyzzy defg qwert asdf hgijkl vbnm xy
15. The next column of the summary table is built by deleting text in the results file and joining the number onto the table line The relevant text in the results file is Address Lookups Instruction Expansions 14285 and the instructions from the EDIT command file are d instruction expansions q g lt 8 gt 0 9 S amp 1 J The first two steps are identical to those used for the first column All lines from the one after the column just built to the one containing the next required number are deleted in the results files Next all text on the line is deleted except for a numeric field consisting of nine characters The j Join command moves the work file position up to the line containing the first column and joins it with the nine character wide column just created EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions There are two more nine character columns in each table line These are built using commands similar to those just presented The final commands used to build the table are tas ly cyes a The a l cycs command opens the summary table file and appends all the formatted lines that were just built into the data file Using the a mark permits changes to the number of lines appended without requiring modification to this command The a command in the CYCS1 file aborts EDIT leaving the results files unchanged EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 35 Error and Information Messages This portion of the appendix
16. linespec 1 linespec 2 U delete field substitute Q Optional line range May be line numbers or any of the line specification characters If omitted the exchange begins and ends with the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Delimiter for delete field and substitute Use any matched punctuation mark except commas and spaces The last delimiter may be omitted if the Q Quiet option is not used Unconditional deletion field Each character causes one character to be deleted The delete field may be a zero length field Deletion starts at the left most column of the window To view the setting for window search columns use the SH WC Show Window Columns command Characters may extend beyond the window The new string to replace the field deleted Number of characters need not be the same as the match field May also be a zero length field Optional Enter the Q Quiet option to suppress listing of matches If no match field and or substitute are entered the U command defaults to the pattern and substitute last entered for any of the exchange commands U G X or Y To view the default pattern and substitute use the SH Show command for any of the exchange commands The line below the last line specified in the range becomes the new pending line All lines in the line range that are shorter than the starting window are blan
17. or H To display information about command specified lt cmd gt or H lt cmd gt To display EDIT abort messages AB or H AB To display explanation of abbreviations EX or H EX To display pattern explanation PA or H PA To display pending line character mode editing information PL or H PL To display line specification information LS or H LS To display regular expression explanation RE or H RE To display EDIT runstring options RO or H RO To display recovery mode messages RM or H RM To display header lines to mark column numbers HL To display header lines to pending lines HLP To display all option setting and default parameters SH ALL To display setting for option specified SH lt opt gt To display text of lines before modification and the SH UN commands used to undo the change To display 20 lines plus next pending line To display line length in characters To display file size in number of lines To display 20 lines with line numbers plus next pending line To display lines without line numbers turns off LN command To display pending line number To display approximate file size in 16 bit words To display 20 lines with numbers and pointer to pending line To display 20 lines with or without line numbers WN WU and WN or WU pointer to pending line To display command stack to allow selection of any command for execution To display EDIT program name and current source file Getting Started Tuto
18. This is the pending line xXxxxx lt 870510 2117 gt X XXXXX lt 870510 2117 gt un xxxxx lt 870510 2117 gt Figure 4 45 UN Undo Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 83 UY Undo List Yank Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 nl n2 Remarks Examples Use to return all or a portion of the lines contained in the EDIT Undo List to the work file inserting them after the current pending line This command modifies the line numbering of the file and thus may invalidate the UN Undo command UY 1 32767 linespec 1 UY n1 n2 Optional line number Enter the line number after which the recovered lines are to be inserted Default is the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Optional Enter the first line on the undo list to be recovered For example enter 1 2 or 3 for the first second or third line from the top of the list Default is the first line of the undo list Optional Enter the number of lines to recover Default is to recover all lines in the undo list from the start line specified An undo list of the last change made is maintained by EDIT The most recent change can be viewed by using the SH UN Show Undo command The UY command rearranges the order of lines in the file but does not alter the undo list Therefore use of the UN Undo command does not reverse the U
19. the numbers plus one is the default size of the window displayed for the W or L commands when only the first line specification is entered Window columns Specifies the left and right columns that are used as the horizontal search window for pattern searches EDIT 1000 Operations 3 27 3 28 IN FL SW SW n Table 3 3 EDIT Session Options continued option petam seen OOOO EDIT 1000 Operations Sets the indentation on or off Fills text to the margins set with SE FL Screen width Uses the SH command to show the current screen width This will be zero until either the command stack or a screen mode command is entered at which time the terminal screen width is sensed Screen width set Uses the SE command to set screen width to n n must be greater than 1 and less than 256 If set is 0 EDIT will sense the width and set the sensed value on the next command stack or screen mode command Screen width is sensed by doing a cursor left from column 1 The cursor position is then read back from the terminal For terminals that do vertical scrolling this will usually return 80 for the screen width To use the vertical scroll option the user must use the SE SW n option to set the desired width View Options The defaults for these options can be checked by using the Show SH command EDIT displays the defaults for all session options as illustrated in Figure 3 3 Command Default Values SH UN shows undo list
20. 1 MO linespec 1 linespec 2 MO Q Required line number or line specification of the first line to be moved If omitted it defaults to the line above the pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Optional line number of the last line to be moved If omitted defaults to the line number specified as the first line and only that line is moved Optional Enter the Q Quiet option to suppress display of the lines moved EDIT will not move a block of lines that includes the current pending line For example if the current pending line is 25 an attempt to move lines 10 through 50 results in an Overlap error message Lines moved are displayed unless the Q option is specified If Q is specified EDIT displays the new pending line only The Undo UN command reverses the MO command Figure 4 31 illustrates the use of the Kx and MO commands to mark and move lines eight through ten to below line 12 The LN List Numbered command is used to display the text prior to the change and the LU List Unnumbered command is used to display the text after the change EDIT 1000 Commands 4 51 This is line 6 This is an example of how the Move command works I m going to move the original lines 8 10 to below the original line 1 The answer is Original line 8 Nein W Original line 9 Signed Karnak Original line 10 This
21. 5020 Third Editi0N Dec 1992 Software Revision 6 0 6000 3 4 Preface EDIT 1000 is a utility program used to input and edit textual information It is part of the RTE Operating System versions A and 6 VM and runs on the HP 1000 system computers EDIT is used to create and modify files containing e Source code for programs in many languages for example BASIC FORTRAN Macro Pascal and C e Text for documents such as memos letters program notes or manuscripts This manual provides a starting point for new EDIT 1000 users and a reference for experienced users A first time EDIT user should read Chapter 1 work through the tutorial in Chapter 2 and then read Chapter 3 for details on the operation of the EDIT program Experienced EDIT users will benefit from the quick reference task charts in Chapter 2 the alphabetical command listing in Chapter 4 and the information on Regular Expressions in Chapter 5 The appendix section on error and information messages will aid both new and experienced users The manual consists of five chapters and appendices CHAPTER 1 EDIT 1000 BASICS Chapter 1 presents the basic concepts and operation of the EDIT 1000 program CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED TUTORIAL Chapter 2 contains a three part tutorial designed to instruct the new user on how to access and exit the EDIT program and to edit a file using the terminal editing keys and line mode commands such as Co
22. Optional list file Opens or creates a list file to store the lines specified Use either an existing filename descriptor a new filename descriptor to create a file or a device number for example to list to a printer Refer to sections in Chapters 1 and 3 on filename specification If this option is to be used the maximum option see above must be specified by either indicating a maximum number of lines or by ce gt using to default to the line range specified Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK dangerous command confirmation prompt displayed when a file descriptor is entered to list lines to another file EDIT 1000 Commands 4 45 Remarks 4 46 EDIT 1000 Commands Note that once LN is used line numbers are displayed for all subsequent list commands To turn off line numbered listing for subsequent list commands use the LU command Refer to section on LU command See the description of the L command for more information and examples LU List Lines Unnumbered Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 max list filedescriptor e Use from line mode to display a block of lines without line numbers Use of this command is only necessary when when the L List command displays a numbered listing and line numbers are not desired e Use to turn off the display of line numbers for succeeding L commands LU 20 linespec 1 linespec 2 LU
23. Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications The Undo UN command can be used to reverse Q command edits If changes made to the line are to be disregarded by EDIT position the cursor on a blank zero length line prior to pressing the carriage return On many terminals the CTRL HOME or SHIFT HOME key moves the cursor to a blank line When the Q command is used but changes are disregarded EDIT displays and keeps the original line If changes are made EDIT does NOT re display the line If line being edited is marked Kx command the mark is displayed in the right margin outside of the screen work area For more on screen mode editing refer to Chapter 3 If editing a line that is more than 78 characters long EDIT displays two dots in the right margin outside of the work area This indicates that the line has been wrapped For such lines EDIT displays the following message Put cursor on first line when edit is complete The first line s of text is deleted unless the cursor is positioned on the first line of the wrapped line prior to pressing the carriage return EDIT 1000 Commands 4 57 4 58 EDIT 1000 Commands If editing a line with less than 78 characters and characters are added to make the line longer than 78 characters the message is not displayed and you must manually insert the dots in the last two line positions If the terminal suppor
24. This command provides the defaults for how lines are displayed on the screen The same information can be changed using the SE SD lt x gt lt y gt lt z gt Set Screen Defaults command where x number of lines displayed above the pending line y number of lines displayed below the pending line and z number of overlap lines When moving from one screen to another EDIT overlaps screens including two lines on the second screen from the previous screen For example the first screen displays lines 701 to 721 If CTRL F is used the second screen displays lines 720 to 740 and CTRL P displays lines 682 to 702 To redefine the default screen size and overlap use the SE Set command to change the SD Screen Default option Figure 4 35 illustrates the result of the command 22 s or go to line 22 and start screen mode ine 22 CTRL U reads CTRL U CTRL U aborts lt lt KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KkKKKK KkKKKK KKKK KKK kkk KKK KKK KkK K kkk kkk k k KKK KkK KKK KKKKK KKK KKK Xx k KKK kkk kkk kkk xk xk kkk XK KKK KKK KkKKKK KkKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LEMON 41 4 Figure 4 35 S Screen Mode Edit Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 67 SC Screen Copy Uses Use in line mode to copy everything in the terminal s screen memory and insert it after the current pending line Command SC Syntax Remarks The Undo UN command reve
25. a The pattern requires that the lines matched should consist of a b or c followed by zero or more occurrences of any character The first second and third lines match since they all consist of a b or c followed by zero or more other characters The fourth and fifth lines do not match because they do not contain one of the letters specified in the pattern The sixth line matches because it does contain one of the letters specified in the character class followed by zero occurrences of other characters EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 15 Alphanumeric Transition Character It is useful to have the ability to match a word of text A word here is defined as a string of characters that is delimited by punctuation characters such as spaces commas or parentheses To illustrate suppose you want to find all occurrences of the word and Using the command F and would find the word and but would also find the words hand command and grand To avoid finding words that contain the word and EDIT provides the Alphanumeric Transition metacharacter for use as a delimiter for the desired string The alphanumeric transition character specifies that no match is to be made when alphanumerics A through Z and digits 0 through 9 occur immediately before or after the desired string Everything else punctuation blanks etc is matched The alphanumeric transition metacharacter matches the zero length string between alphanumeric to punctuat
26. displayed for a screen edit If not set by a SE SL command EDIT picks a default value based on the number of bytes of memory returned by the terminal in response to the primary status request resulting from a screen mode command S Line character edit tab character Note that if the tab character is set to something other than CTRL I CTRL becomes an alternate insert command for line character edits Time stamp ON causes EDIT to update all time stamps when the work file is written to with an ER or WR command Time stamp format is lt YYMMDD HHMM gt where lt and gt are the characters less than and greater than and they enclose the date information The date information is numeric where YY year MM month DD day HH hours and MM minutes Vertical window Use to set the default line range for the W Window and L List commands The first number is the default number of lines above the pending line to start display of a window The second number is the default number of lines below the pending line to end the display Window columns Specifies the left and right columns that are used as the horizontal search window for pattern searches Sets the indentation on or off Fills text to the margins set with SE FL Screen width Uses the SH command to show the current screen width This will be zero until either the command stack or a screen mode command is entered at which time the terminal screen width is se
27. double CTRL C command In this case the prompt displayed is a backslash If an error occurs during execution of the line command entered you are removed from screen mode and placed in line mode Once in screen mode you may use terminal keys and control CTRL keys to edit text Although terminal keys vary between terminal models they usually include cursor arrow keys and insert and delete keys for characters and lines Screen Mode Control Key Commands CTRL A CTRL Z ESC 4 CTRL B In a new file blank lines must be inserted between the top and bottom screen brackets prior to entering text The number of lines inserted is limited only by the size of your terminal memory since EDIT reads the entire terminal screen memory when the applicable control key command is entered If you exceed the terminal screen memory you will lose lines from the bottom of your text screen as well as the bottom screen bracket When the screen is read EDIT will display a screen error message indicating that it could not locate the bottom screen bracket On most terminals the memory lock feature prevents you from inserting too many lines thus exceeding the terminal screen memory and losing the bracket and bottom text On terminals without this feature or when you have turned off the memory lock on your terminal do not insert more lines than your terminal memory supports Consult your terminal reference manual for the terminal screen memory size
28. edits made since the last screen save To cancel a control key combination that you enter but do not wish to execute press some other non command key PRIOR to pressing the carriage return EDIT 1000 Commands 4 61 4 62 CTRL A CTRL Z ESC 4 CTRL B CTRL J CTRL C Note CTRL F CTRL P EDIT 1000 Commands A brief description of the control keys follow For more information on the screen mode refer to the Remarks section for this command and to the section on Screen Mode Editing in Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Operations Moves cursor to the first character on the line Also resets margins set with local terminal keys back to the setting determined by the terminal Moves cursor to the last character on the line Also resets margins see CTRL A If a line is longer than 78 characters CTRL Z moves the cursor to the last character of the line whether that character is on the same line as the first character or five lines below Breaks line into two lines at the current cursor position Blanks are inserted at the front of the second line so that it lines up with the first non blank character of the first line ESC 4 sets a new left margin and CTRL B breaks the line at the new margin Margins are then reset by the command Joins current line to following line Also resets margins see CTRL A Allows execution of one line mode command After carriage return EDIT prompt is displayed if C is used and if C C is use
29. even if hidden by single or double quotes However the Fill command will not put in two blanks where only one is currently in the line for example Dr Foo will not be changed Fill is designed to allow filling of text in boxes The boxes may be standard character set boxes or alternate character set boxes In order to do this Fill counts escape and control sequences and attempts to use column numbers as they appear on the screen In the case of line drawing boxes the ON and OFF control should be immediately before and after each edge otherwise the fill command may assume that they are part of the text to be filled Further extra control characters may confuse the Fill command FL Q R M Options Q Quiet operation don t list changed lines R Remove indentation overrides current SE IN value I Leave indentation overrides current SE IN value EDIT 1000 Commands 4 23 Remarks If more lines are needed in a paragraph they are created by using the break line prior to the lt start gt column and after the lt end gt column If lines are left over after the fill they are purged only if they are totally blank Examples Example of a box before using Fill Til This is text of a box 11 20 A test to see if the fill 82 3 code will actually work These lines need 53 4lto be filled We also have numbers to keep FEA 5 track of the lines RES o 6 TATEA ETARA TEER TILE OS ETE SBEC E
30. filename entered is displayed in the first line of the message The file type is displayed in the second line of the message Check typing Limit n matches lt option gt Informational message displayed after execution of a Find B or F or an Exchange G U X or Y command Indicates that EDIT reached the end of the line range specified and found the number of matches listed The number of matches or the word No is printed at the position of the n For Finds EDIT reports the number of lines containing one or more matches For exchanges EDIT reports the number of exchanges performed If the CF Case Folding or RE Regular Expressions options were set to ON during the search a CF and or RE is displayed None required Line n patched Informational message displayed during a recovery operation indicating that a specific line was corrupted and that EDIT had to interpret it during the recovery The line number of the corrupted line is displayed at the position of the n Examine the line specified following the recovery operation to ensure that it contains the proper number of characters Line limit exceeded Error message displayed when file contains more than 32 500 lines No additional modifications can be made to the file Use the ER Exit and Replace or A Abort command to exit EDIT For more information see the sections on File Size Limit in Chapters 1 and 3 A 6 Error and Information Messages Message Cause
31. k To delete the entire file enter fi Sk Getting Started Tutorial 2 29 To delete ten lines beginning at the current pending line enter O To delete lines 40 through 45 enter MOS When the K command is used and more than one line is to be deleted EDIT displays the message OK requiring you to enter a y yes or n no to confirm or cancel the delete command If you were to delete lines 12 through 18 of TESTFILE and then use the UN Undo command to reverse the delete command your entries and the system response would be displayed as follows HET OK y window through which the user can view a section of Y la Note that the original line 19 line 12 after execution of the K command is listed as the current pending line following the delete Merging Files Suppose you have 200 lines of code that you would like to copy M from file JUNQUE to file REVISEDJUNQUE EDIT s Merge M command allows you to copy text from one file to another file in one simple step The M command is used from the line mode to copy all or part of another file into the current work file inserting it after the current pending line So in this example you Il use the M command from the file REVISEDJUNQUE Before using the M command use EDIT to access JUNQUE the copy from file JUNQUE must be accessed so that you can obtain the line numbers for the first and last lines of the block of text to be merged into REVISEDJUNQUE This
32. substitute side of an exchange command to retrieve a tagged string enclosed in a set of curly braces The position number used corresponds to the order of tagged string sets on the pattern match side of the exchange command For example use the command 1 X amp 1 LST to change the following file names from the way they appear in the first paragraph of Figure 5 17 to the way they appear in the second paragraph EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 17 Figure 5 17 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 X amp 1 LST Upper and Lower Case String Recall gt n lt n On the substitute side of the command the amp 1 recalls the tagged field that contains the first four characters of each line This field is followed by the string LST It is important to note that the same tagged string can be used more than once on the substitute side of the exchange command If desired a tagged string can be retrieved in upper or lowercase This is accomplished using the notation gt n or lt n where n is the position of the tagged string on the pattern match side of the command For example the command J X lt 5 gt gt 2 amp 1 changes the text in the first paragraph below to the order in the second paragraph below ab222 radm8 mr24354 radm7 gh3459809809098 radm3 dm3 radm2 RADM8 ab222 RADM7 mr24354 RADM3 gh3459809809098 RADM2 dm3 Figure 5 18 Matches to the Regular Expression
33. the duplicated line is unchanged Break line at cursor move remaining text to next line Delete characters Replace characters Insert character Same function as CTRL S Frees CTRL S to be used with Xoff protocols Truncate line Extend line adding characters to the end of the line A non printing escape character It is the same as but it does not print It cannot be redefined Current prompt default preserves corresponding character Replacement text to be entered on the new pending line The Undo UN command reverses the O command The duplicated line is displayed as the new pending line after completion of the command For examples see the section on Line Mode Editing in Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Commands 4 55 P Pending Line Edit Uses Command Default Command Syntax Remarks Examples 4 56 EDIT 1000 Commands linespec 1 line character edits CTRL B CTRL C CTRL R CTRL S CTRL P CTRL T CTRL X CTRL Use in line mode to edit the current pending line and display the edited line as the new pending line P linespec 1 P line character edits Optional line specification Indicates the line to be edited If omitted the command edits the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications This command enables use of the line character edits including text entry and use of control CTR
34. to delete a block of lines e Use to create or open a list file to save the lines deleted K1 linespec 1 linespec 2 K max list filedescriptor Optional line range A line range may be specified for this command using either absolute line numbers separated by a space or comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications If no range is specified the exchange affects only the pending line If entered the max parameter has precedence over the second line specification Optional Indicates the maximum number of lines to be deleted Overrides the second line specification If maximum is omitted either the range if provided or one line is deleted If this maximum number is omitted and the option or a list file descriptor is entered two commas must be entered for this parameter for example 1 10 K temp or 1 50 K Optional Specifies that the designated lines are to be appended added to the end of the list file as opposed to overwriting the list file Enter the filename descriptor for the list file to be created or opened If used the MAX parameter must be specified either with a number of lines or with to indicate a default to the line range specified For more information refer to the section in Chapter 3 on filename specifications To append to the current list file use only the o
35. un 15 d g a START PRINT 25 00001 GO TO 20 PRINT 21 00002 GET 18 EOF 3 matches CF 1 d g av OK y 00001 START 00002 PRINT 25 GO TO 20 00003 PRINT 21 GET 18 EOF 2 matches CF Figure 4 9 D Delete Lines Command Examples 4 14 EDIT 1000 Commands EC Exit and Create File Uses Use to exit EDIT session and create a new file Command EC lt filedescriptor gt Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Enter the filename descriptor to be assigned to the new file Refer to the section in Chapter 3 on filename specifications Remarks If you do not specify a file size EDIT determines the number of blocks required to hold your current work file See the ER command description for remarks concerning file errors Examples Figure 4 10 illustrates the use of the EC command to create a new file through EDIT to create a file by copying another file the file LEMON was copied in this example to create JUNQUE and an attempt to create a file using an existing filename ec Zoo Created file ZOO HERMAN 4 24 Closed file ZOO HERMAN 4 24 end of edit Cr gt ec junque Created file JUNQUE HERMAN 4 24 HERMAN 4 24 Closed file JUNQUE Closed file LEMON HERMAN 4 1 24 end of edit CI gt ec zoo File already exists Z00 HERMAN 4 1 EOF Figure 4 10 EC Exit and Create File Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 15 ER Exit and Replace Fil
36. use the command WU List Window Unnumbered Marking a Line Kx The Kx Mark Line command is used to mark a line for future reference During the editing process you will find it helpful to mark certain lines Marked lines can be specified in find copy and move commands making those tasks more efficient and easier to perform Since line numbers change frequently as a result of inserting and deleting text specifying a line mark in find copy and move commands is often more reliable than specifying a line number The command to mark a line in line mode is Kx where x represents any single alphabetic character a z EDIT accepts only alpha characters EDIT indicates an error if punctuation characters are used and deletes lines if numeric characters are used this is because the K or Kill command is entered with a number to delete a specific number of lines Evidence that a line is marked is seen in screen mode where a colon and the alpha character mark are displayed to the right of the marked line outside of the text entry area Use the Show Mark SH MA command from the line mode to show all active marks and their current line numbers As editing continues EDIT Getting Started Tutorial 2 23 Note Saving the File without Exiting EDIT WC WR keeps the marks current by adjusting the line numbers associated with each marked line In line mode a line is marked by entering Kx where x is an alpha character This mar
37. 5 ose a a eae Medea Come acid 3 21 EDIT Session Opin irrita eee nd swe eRe Anta 3 25 Option Setting Examples ivsiccoosiar ries joda ea 3 30 Examples of Screen Mode Commands 0000s o 3 34 EDIT Session Opn sis Saga iad ea este ened bea ea aoe Da 4 70 Metacharacters for Standard Pattern Matching 5 2 Metacharacters for Regular Expressions ON Mode 5 3 14 EDIT 1000 Basics Introduction EDIT 1000 Description This chapter provides descriptions of the basic concepts and structure of the EDIT 1000 program The contents include EDIT 1000 Description and Features EDIT 1000 Information Sources Working with EDIT Overview of EDIT Operations Error and Information Messages The information in this chapter will enable you to Learn about EDIT by using the EDIT online reference help facility the RTE A online Hello tutorial or this reference manual Access the EDIT program by using the EDIT runstring from the RTE system user interface either the Command Interpreter CI or the File Manager FMGR Exit the EDIT 1000 program Briefly describe what is meant by the terms EDIT Work Area Line Mode Screen Mode and Pending Line Recognize EDIT error and informational messages EDIT 1000 is a utility program that runs on the HP 1000 system computers under the RTE A and RTE 6 VM operating systems EDIT 1000 is used to create and modify files containing Source code for progr
38. A A AAA A ata wae I 3 48 Recovery Mode Messages costa ii 3 48 Batch Operation AA E E E He Me BE ES es 3 49 Q and B Runstring Options ii e RAE Vale Cee eee 3 49 EDIT Session Status ee ies ra wate O E EE E ade ERAN 3 49 Entering Multiple Commands on One Line 0 0 eee eee eee 3 50 Running a Program from EDIT e Seas en oa OU ER ale ae ES 3 50 Chapter 4 EDIT 1000 Commands TOCADA A A ite ES 4 1 A Abort Edit Session cssc sericis rl di a o as 4 2 AS Abort and Save Work File opos cisnes io Ei en eos os 4 3 B Find a Pattern ie raid ta ia tdi ei 4 4 BG BIOCK COPY td id 4 6 BK Kill Trailing Blanks amp Truncate Lines 0 0 eee eee eee eens 4 8 BM Block MOVE 6 i co ci awied ata a A Sei veri ETE toast av ees ET E ih 4 9 C Edit Pending Line Advance Line lt csc o ns a saceebalnehs ents elle oes 4 11 CO Copy EINES usted pas Cesc lat ilies te Suen goals bie PUREE Oud weet teas 4 12 Delete Eines rta E oa ea asa cain Melee cals uA eat AAA 4 13 BC Exitand Create EIE si TA AS AAA ADA 4 15 ER Exit and Replace File ii Serene sawed ewe sd da Weed eee esd 4 16 F Bind a Pattern sooo we a ne we ea ea we hos ee ee BE ea E EA 4 18 FCL Hile Close List ss cener cederent A eS OR ee ees 4 20 FCS File Close SQUIEE vecs pp R E 4 21 ETE Input A EA AA A ae se 4 22 BIG CPU aa es E A A EA 4 23 G Character Exchange on Pending Line scc 05 eeu eee cis tees eee es 4 26 HH ta ii 4 28 HL Header Lime ok ge hh eee Ok e
39. AI Packar EDIT 1000 User s Manual Software Technology Division 11000 Wolfe Road Cupertino CA 95014 9804 Manual Part No 92074 90001 Printed in U S A December 1992 E1292 Third Edition NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett Packard This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett P ackard Company RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARs 252 227 7013 Copyright 1983 1987 1989 1990 1992 by Hewlett Packard Company Printing History The Printing History below identifies the edition of this manual and any updates that are inc
40. EDIT 1000 Operations This process determines how a pattern included in a search or exchange command is interpreted It is necessary to understand the process before effective patterns can be created The order used by EDIT to translate search and exchange commands follows 1 EDIT notes the line range if specified then recognizes that it is a command that contains a pattern commands B E G U X and Y 2 EDIT identifies the pattern by noting the first non blank non alphanumeric character after the command mnemonic and uses that character as the pattern delimiter 3 EDIT reads the pattern from left to right to the next delimiter this delimiter must match the first delimiter used and must not be preceded by the escape character 4 EDIT examines the pattern to see if it is legal If the pattern is defaulted and no pattern exists in the default pattern buffer EDIT displays the command placing an arrow under the end of the illegal pattern For example 1 X the gt A 5 If the pattern is legal EDIT scans and parses the rest of the command for the substitute string if it is an exchange command and options Note that the command separator is interpreted as a literal character when within pattern delimiters If you want to include another command on the line the trailing pattern delimiter is required Regular expressions is an EDIT 1000 option that allows pattern searches using regular character stri
41. EDSIL 41 18 4 To create the file TRYLIST consisting of lines one through 40 of the current file the double comma defaults the maximum number of lines field to the line range specified enter the command Ai 40 L teylisi Created file TRYLIST MIRIAM 4 24 Posted file TRYLIST MIRIAM 4 24 Pending line The following examples illustrate two attempts to create the 50 line file NAMES In the first attempt the user chose not to execute the command and entered no to the request for confirmation In the second attempt the command was executed and the existing file NAMES was overwritten with the 50 new lines L 50 names File already exists NAMES 4 24 Opened file NAMES 41 4 OK no Command not executed Closed file NAMES 41 4 1 Yi 50 memes File already exists NAMES 4 24 Opened file NAMES 41 4 OK yes Posted file NAMES 41 4 File is overwritten EOF In the next example the entire contents of file NAMES is deleted and used to create the file NEWFIL Aisi mewitil Closed file NAMES 41 4 5 NEWFIL is still open Created file NEWFIL 41 4 24 Posted file NEWFIL 41 4 24 EOF Note that the list file is posted in the second fourth and fifth examples above This indicates that the file has been opened and written to but has not been closed The command used to close a list file FCL is discussed in the following section When the L or K command is entered wit
42. Figure 3 7 provides examples of including commands in the EDIT runstring CI gt edit lemon 1 x jsm jsb bk se cf of f 1 f jsb 1 msubrtn er CI gt edit lemon 1 u q er Figure 3 7 Including Commands in the EDIT Runstring The first example runs EDIT for the file LEMON performs an exchange X on the entire file to change all occurrences of JSM to JSB suppressing the OK confirmation prompt with a slash deletes all trailing blanks BK sets SE the Case Folding option to off performs a search F to locate the first occurrence of the string JSB goes back up one line in the text and merges M in the file SUBRTN and finally exits the file and replaces the source file with the work file The second example runs EDIT on the file LEMON and performs an unconditional exchange U to place three blanks at the start of each line uses the quiet Q option to suppress a listing of the exchange and exits replacing the source file Note the use of back quotes in the runstring to suppress the special processing performed by CI to change all blanks to commas Running a To run a program from EDIT enter RU followed by the runstring Program If you run another EDIT for any reason do not use the EDIT command separator in the runstring or it will terminate the from EDIT run command 3 50 EDIT 1000 Operations The first example in Figure 3 8 illustrates an attempt to run the help program for additional explanation
43. H command displays any of the following e Aone screen summary of all the EDIT line mode commands and other topics for which help is available e A brief explanation for each command including command syntax default line range and options available e Abbreviations used by EDIT e Pattern and associated special characters e Pending line character editing commands e Regular expressions and metacharacters for pattern search e Line specifications and associated special characters The information display commands provide pattern defaults the default source file name the current status of options and other pertinent information Typical commands of this type are the Show SH and Line Length LE commands For a listing of the commands used to access online reference and the specific topics available refer to the descriptions of the H and Help commands and the SH Show commands in Chapter 4 The RTE A Operating System primary provides an online tutorial that introduces the RTE A Operating System its utilities file system and program development and control A large portion of the Hello program is devoted to EDIT 1000 To access the EDIT 1000 portion of the Hello tutorial 1 Enter hello at the CI prompt Note that if the Hello program is not loaded on your system you will receive the message No such file HELLO See your System Manager to have the program loaded 2 At the Hello Main Menu enter de to selec
44. If this option is to be used the maximum option see above must be specified by either indicating a maximum number of lines or by ce 99 using to default to the line range specified Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK dangerous command confirmation prompt displayed when a file descriptor is entered to list lines to another file EDIT 1000 Commands 4 47 Remarks 4 48 EDIT 1000 Commands Use of the LN command turns on numbered listing for all subsequent list commands The LU command is used to turn off line numbering for subsequent list commands Refer to the section on the LN command See the description of the L command for more information and examples M Merge Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 lt filedescriptor gt start line of lines start line stop line Remarks Use from the line mode to copy all or part of another file into the current work file inserting it after the current pending line M lt filedescriptor gt linespec 1 M lt filedescriptor gt start line of lines or linespec 1 M lt filedescriptor gt start line stop line Optional line number or line specification to indicate where the named file is to be inserted in the work file If omitted the file is merged in after the pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications File
45. It deletes the specified number of characters on each line in the line range regardless of the type of character and replaces the characters with the substitute For example the command 1 U xx line would delete the first two characters of every line in the file and insert the four character string line The Y Exchange and Search command performs one exchange on the line specified in the command and then searches for the next occurrence of the pattern The command syntax for the Y command calls for only one optional line specification linespec 1 Y pattern substitute If a line specification is not entered the exchange is performed on the current pending line This command is useful when there is a need to check the next match before executing the exchange After initiating the exchange process you indicate whether the next exchange is to be performed by entering a y to exchange the string or an f to advance to the next line with a matching pattern EDIT maintains default match patterns that are shared by the find and exchange B F G U X and Y commands If one of these commands is used without a specified pattern a default pattern is used Each time a pattern is specified 1t becomes the default pattern for the next execution of the command There are two pattern default buffers or pattern holders one used for search commands B E D and and one that is used for exchange commands G U X and Y The d
46. Length 0 cece cece cee eee ees 5 24 Learning EXCTOISES AR 5 25 EDIT Regular Expressions and the RTE User Interface 004 5 27 Building File Manipulation Commands 0 0 cece ee cee eee eee 5 27 Gathering Data from Files A is tet s cut tee oped thar eelas 5 29 Appendices Error and Information Messages 9 735 AA A a Se Aa se A 1 EDIT 1000 Program Messages peier eiss enteir rora eiea Dnt enie pons A 1 RTE System and FMP Messages ss lt lt o5 65 4424 pute b o s rare A 14 GIOSSAIV nao a ta ae B 1 Loadine EDFETOOO i sae A a DAS C 1 Memory Regqiuitenients sici2 o e e wee C 2 Help Pile Seen way og eins aes ana ee Ae GG na ee eae Gy aaa ae aga C 2 Work File sui A ey ap Se ee ee RON eh AAA AAA C 2 RTE A Work File Considerations 6 606s cece cee ee cece eee eee eee eeeees C 3 RTE 6 VM Work File Considerations 0 cece eee eee eens C 4 RTE 6 VM Loading Considerations 0 0 cece cece cee ee eee eens C 5 EDIT 1000 in a Multipoint Environment Leica ies D 1 Qand Commands spee ceed wo e A ETE E E E E oe D 1 Tab Control in a Multipoint Environment 0 0 eee eee eee D 3 11 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 3 1 Fi
47. SEWC 1 X 1 lt 14 gt 0 8281 In the preceding command the window column was set to 50 to ensure that all lines are 50 characters long since the U command pads blanks up to column 50 Then the U command replaces nothing with nothing at column 50 Then reset the margins The X command matched the 14 character telephone number and switched it with everything else on the line SEREON SEWC 50 1 U 0 SEWC 1 X 0 9 amp 261 The second version of the command again sets the window to column 50 However it checks specifically for telephone number syntax 5 26 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions EDIT Regular Expressions and the RTE User Interface Building File Manipulation Commands The first portion of this chapter provided an introduction to using Regular Expressions to accomplish sophisticated pattern matching while editing Regular Expressions can also be used in conjunction with the RTE Command Interpreter CI This section provides examples of using EDIT s Regular Expressions with CI to build command files and to construct summary files containing data from several different files The following example explains how to build a CI command file to perform a specific operation on many files within a CI directory The operation illustrated involves compiling and printing many of the FORTRAN sources in the directory A CI command file must be created that runs the FTN7X compiler on each file a
48. SL command EDIT picks a default value based on the number of bytes of memory returned by the terminal in response to primary status request EDIT automatically issues this request when the first S Q or command stack command is issued If an SE SL 0 command is issued EDIT assumes the terminal does not support screen mode and issues an error message in response to an S command EDIT accepts any positive number as the line limit but a value that exceeds the terminal s capability results in data loss during screen mode edits Line character edit tab character Note that if the tab character is set to something other than CTRL I CTRL I becomes an alternative insert command for line character edits Time stamp ON causes EDIT to update all time stamps when the work file is written to with an ER or WR command Time stamp format is lt YYMMDD HHMM gt where lt and gt are the characters less than and greater than and they enclose the date information The date information is numeric where YY year MM month DD day HH hours and MM minutes A time stamp must end as the last or next to last non blank character on a work file line Vertical window Use to set the default line range for the W Window and L List commands The first number is the default number of lines above the pending line to start display of a window The second number is the default number of lines below the pending line to end the display The sum of
49. Tutorial Part3 2 27 Example of Move MO Command oooocccccccococccccc o 2 29 Example of Find F Command with Case Folding OFF 2 32 Example of Output for f e x a Command 00 0005 2 33 Example of Output for f the a Command 000 2 33 Example of Output for x EDIT Edit a Command 2 34 Til C mmand Example A A we Soe aaa E 3 8 Aime Stamp Example ts Ondas 3 9 Example of Display for Show SH Command oo occccococcccc o 3 29 Sample Screen Mode Display cuidada Esas ir daRa 3 35 Examples of EDIT Informational Messages oooocoooocccmmmo m o 3 45 Example of Use of the Abort and Save AS Command 3 47 Including Commands in the EDIT Runstring 3 50 Examples of Running a Program from EDIT 3 51 A Abort Command Examples 0 cece ee eee eee eee 4 2 AS Abort and Save Work File Command Example 4 3 B Find a Pattern Command Examples 000 0000 4 5 BC Block Copy Command Example 000 cece ee eee 4 7 BK Kill Trailing Blanks and Truncate Lines Command Example 4 8 BM Block Move Command Example 0000 eee eee 4 10 C Edit Pending Line and Advance Line Command Example 4 11 CO Copy Lines Command Example 0s eee ee eee 4 12 D Delete Lines Command Examples
50. Varying Lengths 5 22 Inserting a Character at a Specific Column 004 5 22 Moving or Switching Columns of Data 0 0 0 eee ee eee 5 23 Making All Lines a Minimum Length 0 000000004 5 24 List OL Inpul Piles pat Sukhoi town eee a seo ES TA a AA 5 30 Sample Data File a A A A A RAS 5 30 Desired Output 0 A AR AR 5 31 CI Command Ple in A hh A O 5 32 EDIT Command File CYCS1 ooooooooooooooooomoomoomoo o 5 33 Tables Manual Conventions gt Ei A E A A E ek 1 3 EDIT 1000 Quick Start Exercise 60 A a ie sls 2 6 Task Chart for Moving around the Editing Screen 2 36 Task Chart for EDIT Screen Mode Commands 2 37 Task Chart for Line EDIT Commands 0 00000 2 38 Task Chart for Commands that Display Information 2 39 Task Chart for Option Setting Commands 000 2 40 Task Chart for Commands Requiring Confirmation for Execution 2 41 Task Chart for Search Commands 0 eee e eee ee eae 2 41 Task Chart for Exchange Commands 0 eee eee eee 2 42 Task Chart for Delete Commands 0 0 cee e eee ee 2 42 Task Chart for Miscellaneous EDIT Commands 2 43 Task Chart for Commands with Common Defaults 2 44 Line Specification Examples i060 ies heey oaths ia a eee s ae 3 17 Default Pattern Summary css
51. cartridges only and replacement of a file using a security code in the file descriptor er Closed file end of edit CI gt er zoo Opened file Closed file Closed file end of edit CI gt er blimp No such file BLI er edtmp Opened file EDTMP 41 4 Illegal access EDTIMP 41 4 Closed file EDTMP 41 4 er edtmp yl 41 Opened file EDTMP YL 41 4 Closed file EDTMP YL 41 4 end of edit CI gt Figure 4 11 ER Exit and Replace File Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 17 F Find a Pattern Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 pattern A y Q 4 18 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to search your work file for a line containing the pattern specified in the command string and make the matching line the new pending line May specify a multiple search to locate more than one occurrence of the pattern e Use with set option RE regular expressions set to ON to search using the regular expression metacharacters e Use with the Return RT option set to ON default to return to pending line after an unsuccessful search or a multiple search e Use with RT set to OFF to remain at the line below the line range after an unsuccessful search or a multiple search e Use with set option CF case folding set to OFF to differentiate between upper and lower case letters during search e Use with the horizontal search window set WC option to restrict the search to
52. changed changed List L filename Confirmation prompt issued if listing to a file and the existing file is in danger of being overwritten Table 2 8 Task Chart for Search Commands Searching for Patterns command Mnemonic eps To find a Default range is from beginning to end of file pattern Range must be specified for successive searches Confirmation prompt is not issued if only one line is to be Default range is from line after pending line to last line Useful in successive searches pattern Searches forward for pattern specified If pattern is omitted the last pattern specified in B F or command is used pattern Searches backward for pattern specified Defaults are the same as forward search command Getting Started Tutorial 2 41 Table 2 9 Task Chart for Exchange Commands Exchanging Patterns To exchange characters on pending line G To exchange pattern on pending line and search for next Y occurrence of match pattern If found makes that line the pending line To exchange all occurrences of match pattern with Xx substitute pattern Default is exchange only pending line Specify range as 1 for the entire file To unconditionally replace the specified number of characters U with the substitute pattern starting at the left window column Default range is pending line only To affect entire file specify range as 1 Table 2 10 Task Chart for Delete Co
53. column for placement of the moved text block Along with the pending line this parameter defines the upper left corner of the destination If omitted text is moved to the end of the destination line current pending line Optional quiet flag Enter the Quiet option to suppress a listing of the text moved The text from the source area overwrites the text at the destination The source area is replaced with blanks The BM command should be executed from the line where you wish the first line of the moved text to overwrite current text If at the end of the file this command appends the moved text The Undo UN command reverses the BM command Refer also to the BC Block Copy command EDIT 1000 Commands 4 9 Examples Figure 4 6 illustrates the use of the BM command to move columns three and four of lines one through three to line three columns four and five Note the use of the LN List Numbered Lines command to list the lines before and after execution of the BM command AAxxAAA LN 4 00001 AAxxAAA 00002 BByyBBB 00003 CCzzCCC DDDDDDD DDDyyDD ZZ CC xxCC Pending line is line 3 1 LN 00001 AA AAA 00002 BB BBB 00003 CC xxCC 00004 DDDyyDD 00005 ZZ Figure 4 6 BM Block Move Command Example 4 10 EDIT 1000 Commands C Edit Pending Line amp Advance Line Uses Use in line character mode to edit the pending line and then go to the next line Command linespec 1 C line character edits Syntax l
54. continue to enter text for the same line on the next line of the screen Exit the screen mode with either the CTRL U or CTRL U CTRL U command The CTRL U command returns EDIT to the line after the last line in the screen The CTRL U CTRL U command returns EDIT to the first line of the screen For more information on the screen mode refer to the tutorial in Chapter 2 and to the description of the S command in Chapter 4 Filling in Text The Fill command FL is used to fill text to the margins set with the SE FL command and displayed with the SH FL command The lt first gt column is the left fill margin the lt last gt column is the right fill margin and the lt end gt column is the last column from which to gather text Over the range of lines specified this command attempts to fill each line between the fill margins Lines that are too long will have their ending words moved to the next line Lines that are too short will be made longer if possible by moving up words from the following lines Paragraph breaks are indicated by lines that are blank between the lt first gt column and the lt end gt column inclusive The first and last line of the line specification are also treated as a paragraph break The first word of a paragraph may be indented Setting fill indentation ON see the SH IN command keeps the Fill command from moving the first word of a paragraph It starts the fill after the first blank following the first non bl
55. different from the default window size Serves to remind user to change window size back to default before continuing the editing session Attempt Find or Exchange command with a different window size to locate desired pattern After Find or Exchange operation is complete change window size back to default before continuing the editing session A 12 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Work file lt filename gt Informational message displayed when the S option create work file in a different directory is used in the EDIT runstring Indicates the work file to be created at the position of lt filename gt None required Work file error Error message displayed during EDIT initialization Indicates that EDIT was unable to create the work file Followed by a message indicating why the work file could not be created Correct the error You are using I O mapping with a pre A 85 version of IOMAP Please enter E if your terminal is on a M E or F Series machine or A if it is on an L or A Series machine Informational error message displayed when user fails to enter an A or E in response to the message System type of your terminal _ described above Enter an A if terminal is connected to an A Series system or enter an E if terminal is connected to an E or F Series system Install current software Error and Information Messag
56. extended screen saving edits on current screen To display an extended screen without saving edits Command Description Remarks Press and hold CTRL key then press the Z key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL key then press A key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL key then press F key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press F key and release both keys repeat and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press P key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press P key and release both keys repeat and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press Tor S key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press T or S key and release both keys repeat and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press X key Release both keys and press carriage return Press and hold CTRL then press X key and release both keys repeat and press carriage return The character represents the control CTRL key on your terminal 2 36 Getting Started Tutorial Table 2 3 Task Chart for EDIT Screen Mode Commands Editing in Screen Mode To start screen edit beginning at 10 lines above the pending line To set default for screen size initially 10 lines above to 10 lines below the pending line with a 2 line screen to screen overl
57. file system format EDIxx 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 size EDLx 0 crn 1 size OR Eylxx 0 crn 1 size where The FMGR clone name of the EDIT session where xx is usually the session LU If the clone name contains fewer than 5 characters as in EDIT one or more asterisks are added to pad the name A plus is added as the sixth character of the work file name to identify 1t as the work file Same as EDIxx except that the y is replaced by the number of the CPU in the multiple CPU system on which the EDIT session is running The SCRATCH directory if it exists otherwise crn is used If SCRATCH does not exist EDIT puts the work file on the FMGR scratch cartridge specified in SCRN The default value of SCRN is 0 default to top cartridge in crn list SCRN can be changed by the FMGR VL command refer to the RTE 6 VM Terminal User s Guide Do not designate LU 2 or LU 3 to be the scratch cartridge EDIT does not have write access to them You cannot create a module to change SCRN EDIT looks for it only in the system map Usually 512 blocks depending upon the amount of space available in the SCRATCH directory or the top cartridge The work file is automatically extended if more room is needed RTE 6 VM Loading Considerations Under RTE 6 VM EDIT can be loaded by LINK which merges all of its segments into one type 6 file This eliminates the need to load the TSIDM utility or to execute the RP command to re
58. followed by options The characters inside the angle brackets are options and are defined later in the list A lt BEPN gt Arrow Draw a path see the P command for path definition through the defined points and put an arrow head at the end of the path Arrow heads may not display correctly on most terminals however LaserJets with the line drawing character set will display them B lt B EP N gt Box Draw a closed polygon through the defined points C Copy The last point is saved as a locator point and then removed from the list The area defined by the closed polygon through the remaining points is then copied so that the first marked point is on top of the locator point E Erase path The path see P command through the points is erased This is the same as the P E command L lt B E P N gt Lines Take the point list as pairs of points and draw lines between the pairs M Move Same as copy but erase the original area before copying P lt BEPN gt Path Q Quit R Re mark U Undo Options N No read Line Style Options Example Boxes Start at the first point in the list and draw a line through each consecutive point until the end of the list has been reached As always if two points are not aligned horizontally or vertically draw the horizontal line first followed by a vertical line CTRL D mode That is erase all marks and return to normal screen mode Restore the marks of the previo
59. for the applicable systems Table C 1 EDIT 1000 Components MODULE NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION EDIT 92074 12008 RTE 6 VM amp A EDIT program module combined ED000 92074 16055 RTE 6 VM amp A EDIT message module ED1K6 92074 17003 RTE 6 VM load file ED1KA 92074 17005 RTE A load file ED1K6 92074 12005 RTE 6 VM library ED1KA 92074 12011 RTE A library EDIT 92074 17004 EDIT help file Loading EDIT 1000 C 1 Memory Requirements Help File Work File C 2 Loading EDIT 1000 EDIT uses all memory available in its partition up to 32 pages The best performance is achieved if EDIT is sized at 32 pages If EDIT is loaded into a partition of insufficient size approximately 21 pages EDIT issues a message that requests a larger partition and terminates The file EDIT contains all of the text for the EDIT help commands This file must be accessible to EDIT or the help command does not work On RTE A and RTE 6 VM the user can move the file gt EDIT to the global SYSTEM directory under the following name EDIT HLP SYSTEM When a help command is executed EDIT searches the SYSTEM directory for EDITHLP If EDIT does not find it it searches the FMGR cartridges for the file EDIT and uses that file instead EDIT creates a type 1 file called the work file sometimes called the scratch file when you run it If a source file is specified it is copied into this file It is the work file not the source file that yo
60. if specified then recognizes that it is a command that contains a pattern commands B F G U X and Y 2 EDIT identifies the pattern by noting the first non blank non alphanumeric character after the command mnemonic and uses that character as the pattern delimiter 3 EDIT reads the pattern from left to right to the next delimiter the delimiter must match the first delimiter used and must not be preceded by the escape character 4 EDIT examines the pattern to see if it is legal If it is not legal EDIT indicates an error and does not finish parsing the command To indicate an error EDIT displays the command placing an arrow under the end of the illegal pattern not under the illegal character For example 1 F lt 2 gt N In the preceding example EDIT indicates the error by placing the arrow under the end of the illegal pattern string to indicate that there is not a closing curly brace 5 Ifthe pattern is legal EDIT scans and parses the rest of the command for the substitute string if it is an exchange command and options To change uppercase characters to lowercase or vice versa use the command SE RE on Set Regular Expressions ON Then enter the first command following to change uppercase letters to lowercase or the second command to change lower to uppercase 1 X lt 1 X gt 5 20 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Capitalizing First To capitalize the first letter of all wor
61. in line mode unless you have indicated that you wish to be placed in screen mode when you start EDIT The recommended method for using EDIT is to enter text in the screen mode and move back into line mode to accomplish such activities as searching and exchanging text strings deleting several lines of text displaying quick reference information on command syntax and merging text from another file Details on using the screen and line modes are provided in the tutorial in Chapter 2 In the Line Mode often referred to as the command line mode EDIT displays one line of text at a time and the EDIT prompt character is displayed on the following line The line of text displayed is the text that will be altered by any edits and it is referred to as the current pending line EDIT commands are typed in at the EDIT prompt and are entered into the system by using the carriage return When the pending line or text listings are output by EDIT they are always preceded by two blank spaces This convention allows room for the EDIT prompt and a single character command which aligns the new text with that displayed by EDIT Error and information messages in contrast always begin in column 1 so that the difference between an EDIT message and a line of text can be easily determined Screen Mode Editing In the line mode example following the EDIT prompt and the first line of text the pending line are displayed when EDIT is first accessed f
62. is accomplished by using the RU Run Program command to run another copy of EDIT After determining the line numbers assume the first line is line 82 and the last line is 281 exit JUNQUE using the A command no changes were made Now locate your current pending line at the line where you want to merge the text from JUNQUE You want to merge the text at the end of your file REVISEDJUNQUE so enter at the EDIT prompt to go to the end of the file Now enter the merge command Your entries from the line mode of REVISEDJUNQUE and the system response follow m junque 82 281 Opened file JUNQUE HERMAN 4 664 38 200 lines read Closed file JUNQUE HERMAN 4 664 38 System lists last line line 281 merged 2 30 Getting Started Tutorial it E Finding a Pattern F B To try the Merge command create a file NEWFILE using the same commands used to create TESTFILE Type in about 30 lines of text Open the file TESTFILE and merge in lines 10 through 20 of file NEWFILE at line 15 of TESTFILE Use the command 15 m newfile 10 20 EDIT supplies two commands that can be used to search your file for character strings The F and B commands are both referred to as Find a Pattern commands A line specification can be used with either command to specify the range for the pattern search The only difference between the commands is the default range If no line specification is indicated for the B command the search operat
63. is complete EDIT 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers develop software quickly and accurately with minimal effort EDIT 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of the terminal and can also move the window forward or backward any number of lines within the file The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which are often faster and more convenient to use than the line edit commands of the editor Figure 2 10 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the Tutorial Part 2 Getting Started Tutorial 2 19 Entering Line Commands from Screen Mode C E er Displaying Information H SH The ED
64. is used EDIT deletes to the end of the line range specified e Use with RE regular expressions ON to use metacharacters Use the SE RE ON command to turn on regular expressions refer to Chapter 5 for more information on metacharacters e Use with the V option to delete lines containing the pattern specified e Use with CF case folding OFF to differentiate between upper and lower case letters Use SE CF OFF command to turn off case folding e Use with the horizontal search window set WC option to restrict the search to within the specified columns Command 1 D last find pattern Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 D pattern A V Q N Syntax linespec 1 Optional line range May be absolute line numbers or line linespec2 specification characters with or without offset If the first range parameter is omitted the delete begins at the current pending line and deletes that line whether or not a match to the pattern is found The pattern search then starts on the next line If second range parameter is omitted pattern search continues to the end of the file See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 pattern Pattern to match Use any matching punctuation marks except commas and spaces as delimiters If no options are used the second delimiter may be omitted If no pattern is specified search defaults to the last pattern specified for either the F D or B commands Use the Show SH command to
65. is used for the Copy command Tower eae apusts Used in command syntax display to indicate variables to be replaced by values as defined in the text For example n is often used to indicate the entry of an integer T n1 n2 n3 Indicates parameters that are optional Indicates information that is to be input by the user For example lt command gt lt options gt lt text gt x or CTRL x The caret symbol or the abbreviation CTRL are used to represent the CONTROL key on your terminal keyboard Many EDIT commands require you to press and hold the control key and then depress the alphabetic key For example B or CTRL S A screen mode control key command is always followed by a carriage return CI gt The Command Interpreter user interface prompt The EDIT pro gram can be initiated from this prompt or from the File Manager FMGR prompt The examples in this manual use the Cl gt prompt EDIT 1000 Basics 1 3 EDIT 1000 Information Sources Online Quick Reference RTE A Hello Program 1 4 EDIT 1000 Basics There are many ways to learn about EDIT 1000 ranging from reading the manual to experimenting with the program The most common methods follow e Refer to EDIT s online Quick Reference facility e Use the RTE A online tutorial Hello e Read the first three chapters of this Manual Online reference is easily accessed with the EDIT help and information display commands The help or
66. last character to be retained Strike the ENTER key to enter all the characters between the left margin and the current cursor position The intrinsic terminal key CLEAR DISPLAY can also be used to delete characters at the end of a line After using the CLEAR DISPLAY key the ENTER key is used to enter the edited line For example Q ABCDEFGHIJKL Position cursor under I a press ENTER key ABCDEFGH Edited line is displayed Q ABCDEFGH Position cursor under F press CLEAR DISPLAY then ENTER ABCDE Edited line is displayed To add characters in the middle of a line the INSERT CHAR key may be used Press the INSERT CHAR key The red light above the key should come on Move the cursor to the position where the characters are to be added and type in the new characters Finally position the cursor at the end of the line and hit the ENTER key The insert light will go off and the edited line will remain as the pending line For example Q ABCDEFGHIJKL Position cursor underneath F depress the INSERT CHAR key and type in the new characters 123 Position cursor at end of line and press ENTER ABCDEF123GHIJKL Edited line is displayed EDIT 1000 in a Multipoint Environment Tab Control in a Multipoint Environment To delete one or more characters position the cursor under each character to be deleted and press the DELETE CHAR key The character wi
67. letter for marked lines is displayed in column one An arrow gt is displayed to the left of the pending line If the pending line is also marked the arrow is displayed instead of the mark Examples This is a vertical window of the text entered on lines 1430 through 1440 of this file Only 11 lines are listed because this command was initiated near th nd of the file To list this same block of lines without line numbers you would use the command 1430 WU To view the current vertical window setting use the SH VW Show Vertical Window command To set the window use the SE VW Set Vertical Window command Figure 4 47 W List Window Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 85 WC Create File without Exit Uses Command Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Remarks Examples wWC ZOO Created file ZOO Closed file ZOO HE EOF wc zoo File already exists Z00 HERMAN 4 1 Pending line Use to create a new file without exiting EDIT WC lt filedescriptor gt Enter the filename descriptor to be assigned to the new file Refer to section in Chapter 3 on filename specification See the ER Exit and Replace command description for remarks regarding file errors Figure 4 48 illustrates the use of the WC command to create a new file and an attempt to create a file with an existing filename ERMAN 4 1 RMAN 4 1 Figure 4 48 WC Create File without Exit Com
68. line 6 to list 40 lines from a marked line to list lines 140 to 144 to create a list file with 20 lines maximum and to close NEWFILE and exit to check the contents of NEWFILE Additional examples illustrate the use of the L command to append the entire original file to the end of EXISTINGFILE to list the current file to a line printer where 6 is the Logical Unit number of the line printer to copy 100 lines to the file NAMES while leaving the file open and to list numbered and unnumbered lines EDIT 1000 Commands 4 41 1 5 L20 ENZO 140 144 L 1 20 mem le Created file NEWFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 Posted file NEWFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 EOF AN Closed file NEWFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 wr Posted file ORIGINAL HERMAN 4 24 20 fi newfile Closed file ORIGINAL HERMAN 4 24 20 Opened file NEWFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 200 lines read First line of file is displayed AS Ms recalar SS Opened file EXISTINGFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 Appending to file Posted file EXISTINGFILE HERMAN 4 24 20 EOF 1 6 M o a OO nones Opened file NAMES 41 4 Appending to file OK y Posted file NAMES 41 4 EOF LN3 00023 First line 00024 Second line 00025 Third line Also the new pending line LU2 First line listed with the LU command Second line listed with the LU command Figure 4 27 L List Command Examples 4
69. message displayed when an input command FI EDIT TR or M or a write command ER or WR is used on a directory that is write protected Check typing to ensure that the correct directory was specified log on as the owner of the directory or see the System Manager to investigate possible access to the directory FILE ALREADY EXISTS Displayed when user attempts an EC Exit and Create or WC Write and Create command on an existing file Use an ER Exit and Replace or WR Write and Replace command to overwrite the existing file or select a new filename and use the EC or WC command A 14 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action FILE IS ALREADY OPEN Information message indicating that another program is using the file specified Use the Command Interpreter DL Directory List command with the O option to find out which program is using the file FILE READ PROTECTED Error message displayed when user attempts to use an FI File Input EDIT TR Transfer or M Merge command to access a file that is read protected Check typing to ensure that the correct file was specified log on as the owner of the file or see the System Manager to investigate possible access to the file FILE WRITE PROTECTED Error message displayed when an input command FI EDIT TR or M
70. monitors the line specification and reports an error if an illegal line range or specification is entered For example if the first line number entered for a Find F command is greater than the second line number an error message similar to the following would be displayed 20 15 F smurf 2 Start gt stop The table below provides examples of line specifications Valid line specifications for each command are provided in Chapter 4 of this manual Table 3 1 Line Specification Examples Search F entire file for the first occurrence of the string OK Search F from pending line to last line for the string TEH Delete K lines 10 through 59 List L from pending line to 10 lines above the last line Exchange X AUG with SEPT from line 1 to 10 lines below the pending line Go back up 10 lines and make it the new pending line Go forward 10 lines and make it the new pending line Go back 40 lines and show vertical window EDIT returns to pending line Search forward for first occurrence of CAKE Search backward for first occurrence of CAKE Search backward for first occurrence of CAKE when used after a search for CAKE Move MO 6 lines starting from 20 lines below the pending line Go to last line make it new pending line Go to first line make it new pending line Edit line 40 Edit 5 lines above the pending line Move lines marked with x through y to after the pending line Mark
71. move the window forward or backward any number of lines within the file The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which are often faster and more convenient to use than the line edit commands of the editor Figure 2 14 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the Tutorial Part 3 Getting Started Tutorial 2 27 Copying Text The CO Copy command is used from the line mode to copy one CO or more lines of text The text to be copied is specified in the command either with a range of line numbers or with line markers Use of the line markers is easier from the screen mode To copy a range of lines by specifying line numbers determine the line numbers of the first and last lines of the text block to be copied Do this by using the N Line Number or W Window command from the line mode remember to use U to exit screen mode You may need to press the carriage return a few times this prints out successive lines of the text or enter or n where n is the number of lines to go forward or back in the text to locate the desired lines of text Once the desired line is located use the N command to print the line number The line numbers are then used with the CO command to copy the text The text is copied and inserted below the current pending line so you must set the pending line to the desired location prior to using the copy command This is accomplished from the line mode by entering the line num
72. new edits are saved If entered as CTRL F CTRL E carriage return the screen is not read by EDIT new edits are ignored and the next screen is displayed more quickly Screens displayed are bracketed by a beginning line and an ending line that provide the beginning and ending line numbers of the portion of the file being displayed See Figure 1 3 In addition the beginning line displays the command used to exit the screen mode and return to the line mode CTRL U or CTRL U CTRL U followed by a carriage return The ending line displays the file descriptor of the file being edited unless you are editing a new file and did not specify a filename when initiating the EDIT program EDIT 1000 Basics 1 11 gt gt xxxe Line ZQRERAREKAR Ctrl reads ctrl 0 ctrl U aborts KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKK KkKKK K kK K kkk kkk KKK KK KK K KkKKKK KkKKK K kK K KKK xk xk KKK kkk KKK KkKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KkKKKK KkKKK kkk KKK kkk k k KK KK K KkKKKK KKKK KKK KKK kkk KkK KK KK K KkKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKKCS Pending Line 1 12 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LEMON 41 4 Figure 1 3 Screen Example To enter text into a new file in screen mode you must position the cursor on the bottom screen bracket line and use the insert line key on your terminal to insert sufficient lines for text entry Do not type over the beginning or ending screen brackets or you will receive an error me
73. non printing escape character It is the same as but it does not print It cannot be redefined Enter the current prompt default to preserve the character in that position on the pending line Skip to the next tab stop if in replace mode CTRL R leave the skipped over characters unmodified Note that lt tab gt defaults to CTRL I and the terminal will probably move the cursor to the next terminal tab stop when it is entered The terminal tabs may not match EDIT s internal tab stops and therefore the display text may not match the internal text For more information refer to the information on the TL and TS commands under the description of the T command in Chapter 4 For the R Replace Pending Line with Text command and the space command the tab operation inserts blanks up to the next tab stop During replace mode the tab character can be used to preserve existing characters up to the next tab stop The command separator character default is terminates a line character edit command To use a literal command separator in a line character edit use the escape character to nullify the special meaning of any command Line Character Edit Examples The following examples illustrate line mode edits that can be used to delete replace and insert characters and edits that can be used to truncate extend and break text lines Each example uses the Pending Line Edit P line mode command with the approp
74. of Source File F work File Copy of STEP 5 Source File EDIT uses edited version F of work file to write over Source File F then purges work file q Edited Version of Work STEP 2 EDIT places work file in work STEP 4b area on disk User exits gt saving changes STEP 4a User exits EDIT with pelis ont Saving Source File changes User edits A work file User performs step 4a OR 4b TRASH Figure 1 2 Overview of EDIT Operations for an Existing File EDIT 1000 Basics 1 9 Using EDIT to Enter Text Line Mode Editing 1 10 EDIT 1000 Basics The EDIT program can be operated in two different ways e interactive operation e batch operation When the EDIT 1000 program is run interactively you carry on a dialog with the program entering text and receiving information and error messages from EDIT as necessary When EDIT is run in batch operation it is driven from a file and is not interactive Batch operation is discussed in Chapter 3 of this Manual The EDIT program is typically run interactively Interactive operation has two editing modes e Line mode allows you to edit a single line of text at a time and enter line commands that modify a group of lines e Screen mode allows you to view several lines of text at a time and edit using the local terminal keys and control key combinations Line mode is the default editing mode When the EDIT program is initiated you are placed
75. of text A Figure 2 17 Example of Output for f e x a Command The second metacharacter provided by EDIT is the caret The caret is referred to as the anchor character and is used at the beginning of a pattern to indicate that EDIT is to match only those lines where the pattern occurs at the beginning of the line For example to find all occurrences of the word THE in TESTFILE that occur at the start of a line enter the command Ai z cne a Figure 2 18 illustrates the lines matched by this command in the TESTFILE sample text 00022 the terminal and can also move the window forward or backward any 00025 The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which Figure 2 18 Example of Output for f the a Command EDIT provides several other metacharacters that can be used for more sophisticated pattern matching in both find and exchange commands These metacharacters can be used when the EDIT Getting Started Tutorial 2 33 Exchanging a Pattern X G it gr Regular Expressions option RE is set to ON This type of pattern matching is quite involved and powerful For instructions on using the metacharacters available with Regular Expressions ON refer to Chapter 5 EDIT Regular Expressions EDIT supplies two commands that enable you to exchange one or more occurrences of a character string with a substitute string The X and G commands are both referred to as Exchange commands and a line specificatio
76. on the error message Illegal file name In the second example another copy of EDIT is run on the file TEST The second copy of EDIT is then exited with an ER command and the original editing session is resumed ec123 Illegal file name 123 4 4 ru help FMGR 015 ILLE i THE E E ES NOT CONFORM TO THE SYNTAX RULI AND RE ENTE COMMAND Resume HAP1 41 4 cui Sci case EDIT user for help no such file TEST An ER or the first WR will create it EOF File is edited er Closed file TEST 41 4 end of edit Resume EDIT on CHAP1 41 4 Figure 3 8 Examples of Running a Program from EDIT EDIT 1000 Operations 3 51 EDIT 1000 Commands Introduction This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the EDIT 1000 commands and options The contents include e descriptions of the EDIT 1000 alphabetic commands e descriptions of the EDIT 1000 non alphanumeric commands For each command the description includes the uses command syntax remarks and examples For most commands a summary of the command default is also included The information in this chapter will enable you to e understand the operation of each EDIT 1000 command e select the EDIT 1000 commands needed to accomplish your tasks EDIT 1000 Commands 4 1 A Abort Edit Session Uses Use to abort EDIT 1000 session without saving changes Command A Syntax Suppresses t
77. option 4 72 Index 3 G G command 2 34 3 18 4 26 global changes 2 24 See also G command X command U command go to a specific line 4 54 H H command 1 6 2 20 4 28 header lines 4 31 help 1 6 2 20 4 28 4 94 Help command 4 94 HL command 4 31 horizontal search window 3 18 I command 4 33 IC option 3 26 indefinite character 2 33 3 18 5 2 5 15 indefinite character option 3 26 information display See displaying information messages 3 45 A 1 information messages 1 15 See also error messages inputting a file 2 9 inquire control character 3 26 inserting a comment 4 100 characters 2 12 characters at a specific column 5 22 lines 2 12 text 2 12 2 28 3 33 4 33 text in line character edit mode 3 27 interactive operation 1 10 3 50 J J command 4 34 joining files 2 30 4 49 joining lines line mode 4 34 screen mode 3 38 4 62 K K command 2 23 2 29 3 6 4 35 Kill K command 2 29 kill lines 4 35 kill trailing blanks 4 8 Kx command 2 23 4 38 L L command 2 22 3 6 3 46 4 40 append option 4 41 LN version 4 40 Index 4 LU version 4 40 LE command 4 43 LE option 3 26 learning exercises 5 25 LI command 4 44 line break 3 37 4 62 character edits 3 31 feed control character 3 26 header 4 31 join 3 38 4 34 4 62 length 3 3 3 13 3 42 4 43 length option 3 26 marks 2 23 2 28 3 15 number 2 21 2 24 2 28 number in file 4 4
78. provides a listing of the EDIT 1000 error messages and those system messages that most often occur while using EDIT The errors are listed alphabetically in chart form Those errors beginning with a number or variable string are listed first Each error is listed as it is displayed and an explanation of the error and suggestions for remedial action are provided EDIT 1000 Program Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action n lines read Informational message displayed after a file is read in to be edited or in response to a M Merge command Indicates the number of lines copied from the file Message indicates number of lines at the position of the n None required n lines recovered Informational message displayed when EDIT is running a recovery operation indicating the number of lines recovered in the file at the position of the n None required Appending to file Informational message displayed when the append option is used with the L List or K Kill command None required Auto LF must be off Error message indicating that the automatic line feed is enabled on your terminal The automatic line feed must be turned off before EDIT will function correctly Turn off automatic line feed or see System Manager Error and Information Messages A 1 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Ac
79. remote account is incorrect Check typing INCORRECT SECURITY CODE A File Manager error message indicating that the security code specified is incorrect If file is to be updated use an FI File Input command with the correct security code to input the file NO SUCH ACCOUNT Error message displayed when a non existent account is specified during log on to a different distributed system Check typing NO SUCH CARTRIDGE File Manager error message indicating that the cartridge number specified does not exist Check typing NO SUCH DIRECTORY Error message displayed when user specifies a directory that is non existent Check typing or use system commands DL to find the correct name of the directory NO SUCH FILE Error message displayed when an FI File Input ER Exit and Replace M Merge or TR Transfer command is used to input a file that does not exist in the current working directory or the directory specified in the command Check typing ensure that the correct directory was specified A 16 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action NO SUCH NODE Error message displayed when a non existent node is specified while attempting to access a file on a different distributed system Check typing RAN OUT OF DISK SPACE Error message indicating that there is insufficient disk space to complete the operation and that the source file has been corrupted at
80. specified columns 1 F last find pattern linespec 1 linespec 2 F pattern A V Q N Optional line range A line range may be specified for this command using either absolute line numbers separated by a space or comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications If no range is specified the search begins at line below the current pending line and goes to the end of the file Pattern to be found Use any matching punctuation marks except spaces or commas as delimiters If no options are used with the command the last delimiter may be omitted The default pattern is the last one specified in a B D E or command Use SH lt B D or F gt command to check default pattern Optional all flag Enter to find and list all occurrences of the pattern A message provides the total number of matching lines found and the options affecting the search CF and or RE Optional reverse flag Enter to find line s that do NOT contain the pattern specified Optional quiet flag Enter the Q Quiet option with the A option to indicate the total number of matches located without listing the matched lines N Optional Enter the N No Window option to disregard the horizontal window columns setting and allow a match anywhere on a line To view setting for window columns use SH WC command Remarks The F command is similar to th
81. start of the line or search window Table 3 2 Default Pattern Summary Command Match Substitute EDIT Action Pattern Pattern FB D None or N A F EDIT uses default find pattern and null F A G X and None xX EDIT uses default exchange pattern Y specified 1 X Q and associated substitute pattern Y also sets the Find default G X and Null Null X EDIT uses default find pattern Y specified specified and a null substitute pattern This becomes new default pair for ex change commands Y also sets the Find default G X and Null Specified X XYZ EDIT uses default Find pattern and Y specified specified substitute pattern This becomes new default pair for ex change commands Y also sets the Find default None EDIT uses default exchange pattern specified 1 U Q and associated substitute pattern U Null Null U EDIT interprets this as a zero specified specified length delete and substitute field It replaces nothing with nothing but blank pads to left search win dow U Null Specified U XYZ EDIT interprets this as a zero specified length delete field and a sub stitute field Command Parsing EDIT reads commands from left to right separating the individual units of the command line specifications command mnemonic options etc for translating This process is referred to as parsing EDIT 1000 Operations 3 21 Regular Expressions Pattern Specification 3 22 xyz 2 wxy lt n gt
82. system being used EDIT requires execution confirmation for commands that either delete or significantly alter data that is dangerous commands This is done with the OK prompt that is displayed following the entry of any of the following commands Abort A Abort and Save Work File AS Delete D File Input FI Exchange G amp X Kill K Transfer TR Unconditional Exchange U and Exchange and Search Y After editing the file TESTFILE the command entry and program response for the Abort A command would look similar to the following CI gt edit editing performed a OK y EDIT aborted by user Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 1 end of edit CI gt EDIT 1000 Basics 1 13 1 14 EDIT 1000 Basics The asking feature can be suppressed two different ways The command entered can be terminated with the EDIT prompt character for example a as follows al EDIT aborted by user end of edit CI gt or the Set SE command can be used to set the asking option AS to OFF as follows SNS ASKING s o 2 ms ss AS off The first method terminating commands with the EDIT prompt character is the recommended method because leaving the AS option set to ON provides a safeguard against key stroke mistakes Error and Information Messages Two types of error or information messages are displayed during operation of the EDIT 1000 program EDIT program errors and RTE system errors
83. the command use U to escape the screen mode then enter un Use the UN command to reverse the copy command you just used in TESTFILE Moving Text The MO Move command moves one or more lines of text from MO their original position to after the pending line The command is entered proceeded by a beginning and an ending line number If only one line is to be moved you do not have to indicate an ending line number For example assume you wanted to move lines three through six of TESTFILE to after the first line of the file After using U to escape the screen mode your entries and the system response would look similar to Figure 2 15 E EDIT 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers BGR 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material Figure 2 15 Example of Move MO Command Use the MO command example described above and then use the UN sal Undo command to reverse the move Deleting Text K The command to delete lines of text is appropriately named the Kill K command The K command is executed from the line mode using either a line range specification prior to the K in the command string or a number of lines after the K For example to delete the current pending line enter
84. the point where the system ran out of disk space Note that the work file now contains the ONLY VALID VERSION of your file DON T ABORT EDIT Either 1 use the RU Run command to run CI Command Interpreter from EDIT and enter commands to create more space that is purge unneeded files or pack the directory or 2 use the EC Exit and Create command specifying a different directory to create a new file on a directory that has sufficient space Error and Information Messages A 17 Glossary Following is a glossary of terms that you will encounter throughout this manual Many of the terms are further explained in Chapter 1 EDIT 1000 Basics and Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Operations anchor A character used to start a search or a match at the beginning of the search window case folding An option initially turned on to allow recognition of either upper or lower case letters character class A group of characters any one of which can be used as the character to be searched matched closure 662 99 The metacharacter used to make a text pattern which matches zero or more successive occurrences of the single character pattern For example x matches zero or more x s xx matches one or more x s a z matches any string of zero or more lower case letters Ifa number of combinations are present the longest one is used Note that for in pattern specification the shortest is used command stack A list of ED
85. the use of the SH ALL command a Edi Command Default Values REFCHAPTER HERMAN 4 148 42 List file F B D or line spec pattern G U X or Y match G U X or Y substitute Number of marks File modified flag Global Option Settings Tab character tab cntl 1 Tab columns 7 21 Search window columns 1 256 Screen defaults 10 Maximum screen mode lines Vertical window 10 Line length Anchor character Case folding F Escape character Regular expressions Indefinite character Return to dot if no match Prompt character Screen mode display functs DE Command separator Time stamp lt YYMMDD HHMM gt SH UN shows undo list Figure 4 38 SH Show Options Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 73 SZ Check File Size Uses Use in line mode to display the number of words in the file from line one of the file to the current pending line Note that record length words those used by EDIT to format the text file are not included in the size reported Command linespec 1 SZ Syntax linespec 1 Optional line number for end of count Enter a line number or for end of file to determine where the count stops For example 20 SZ counts words from line one to line 20 Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks To obtain the TOTAL number of words in the file the last line number for the file or a must be spe
86. to add a line of text following the pending line making the appended line the new pending line Command lt space gt text Syntax Remarks A lt space gt as the first character in the command line is the command to append a line of text to the work file The space is removed tabs are expanded and escape processing is done The resulting line is put into the work file and becomes the new pending line If this command is entered without any text a zero length line is inserted into the text Examples Figure 4 56 illustrates the use of the space command to add a new line of text The L List command is used to display the text before and after the execution of the space command L3 Line one Line two Line three New line added Seine Line one Line two Line three New line added Figure 4 56 lt space gt Append a Line Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 97 _ Repeat Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 n Q Remarks Examples 4 98 EDIT 1000 Commands Used to repeat the execution of a command line a specific number of times Must be at the end of the command line separated from the other commands on the line by a command separator 1 1_ lt number entered gt linespec 1 linespec 2 _ n Q Command separator Must precede the repeat command separating it from the rest of the command or text Line range for execution If the pending line is outside of this l
87. to exit the screen mode the line number is not displayed long enough for you to read it In screen mode the first and last line numbers are displayed in the screen bracket lines One way of getting from line one to line 798 of your file is to use the F key to page through the screens of text until line 798 is located EDIT provides a shortcut for this time consuming activity The n Specific Line Number command enables you to go to any line in the file by entering the desired line number or a to go to the end of the file Getting Started Tutorial 2 21 Displaying a Portion of the File L W To try this out use C from the screen mode followed by a carriage return At the prompt enter any line number or a The line for which a number was entered is the current pending line on the new screen displayed The cursor is located on the pending line which is at the center of the screen If a was entered the cursor is located on the current pending line which is the line above the end of file line EDIT provides two line mode commands that enable you to display blocks of text from the line mode L List and W List Window If you are using the screen mode you may wish to include line specifications with these commands to display specific portions of the file to visually scan the entire file or to list the file or portion of the file to a printer while editing The L List command allows you to display either the entire fil
88. to identify a string or field that is to be switched or moved on the line The string to be moved is referred to as a tag field or tag string and right and left curly braces are used to enclose it in the pattern For every left curly brace there must be a matching right curly brace Within the exchange commands G X and Y you specify both the pattern to be matched and the character string to be substituted The tagged string curly braces are used on the pattern match side of an exchange command The characters amp n gt n and lt n are used on the substitute side of the exchange command to indicate where and how the tagged string is to be recalled on the newly edited line See the Tagged String Recall metacharacters following For example the command F matches the boxed items in the following text CNTLD_CMDS FTN PRINT_CMDS F TN Figure 5 16 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F Tagged String Recall amp n The pattern indicates that EDIT is to find the longest possible string that begins in column one of the line and does not contain a dot It is to find at least one and as many as possible non dot characters The first and third lines match the pattern because they consist of one or more non dot characters that begin at column one of the line The second line does not match since the line begins with a dot The amp n notation where n is a position number is used on the
89. window with the applicable line numbers to the left of the text EDIT indicates the current pending line by placing an arrow to the left of the line number The window command does not change the pending line 2 22 Getting Started Tutorial The window command also allows you to specify a line range and defaults to display 21 lines of text If you used U to exit the screen mode and entered the command Ae Bi w on the sample text file the text would be displayed as illustrated in Figure 2 12 which follows 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of Figure 2 12 Example of Window W Command Output If you want to display the text without line numbers
90. 0 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x A Z0 9 y 5 12 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F ABC 5 12 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F A 5 13 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F abc 5 13 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F lt 4 gt 5 14 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F abc lt 3 gt a 5 14 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F abc a 5 15 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy 5 16 13 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 2 10 Table 2 11 Table 2 12 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F 5 17 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command LD hit OSL LST fn citer iets s da 5 18 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command e Oo OER a toad get e eV ae las e a a 5 18 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 15934 20 OT HOH lab SA cbt hed ewe aed tute ties aw se 5 19 Capitalizing First Letter of All Words ina File ooo o ooo 5 21 Adding Text to the End of Lines with
91. 23 sets 5 10 5 11 specification 3 18 strings 5 2 substitute B 3 PC option 3 26 pending line character exchange 4 26 deleting current 2 29 description 1 12 3 31 displaying character edit information 2 39 displaying line number 2 21 edits 2 38 3 31 4 11 4 34 4 55 4 56 4 59 line mode display 1 10 line number 2 21 pointer 2 22 return 2 20 screen mode display 1 12 setting location 2 28 starting screen mode 3 34 pending line edits 2 38 3 31 posting a file 3 7 printing 3 9 Prompt Character PC option 3 26 punctuation characters 2 23 2 31 2 34 purging a file 3 11 text 2 12 Q Q command 4 57 QU option 3 26 quick reference task charts 2 36 Quiet Q option 3 24 quiet mode 3 4 3 26 Index 5 quiting EDIT 3 10 saving changes 2 17 without saving changes 2 8 screen mode 1 11 3 42 R R command 3 32 4 59 RE option 3 26 4 88 4 90 re executing a command 2 35 reading in a file 2 9 reading the screen 2 11 2 24 recovery mode 3 4 3 47 B 3 See also recovery operation recovery mode error messages 3 48 recovery operation 1 2 1 8 3 4 3 46 Regular Expressions See also metacharacter and RTE user interface 5 27 building CI command file 5 27 creating patterns 5 20 definition 3 22 5 2 B 3 exercises 5 25 gathering data from files 5 29 line length limitations 5 5 5 6 match one or more occurrences 5 13 match zero or more occurrences 5 12 Regular Expressio
92. 26 displaying a file 2 22 information 2 20 2 39 large screen 2 16 line number 2 21 4 53 online reference 4 94 options 3 29 See also viewing options portion of a file 2 22 See also L command W command source file status 4 95 text 4 40 dollar sign See end of file metacharacter dot metacharacter 5 7 duplicate pending line and edit See O command E EC command 1 7 2 9 2 17 3 6 3 46 4 15 EC option 3 26 edit pending line and advance See C command EDIT 1000 accessing the program 1 6 basics 1 1 command listing 2 20 options B 2 syntax 3 13 description 1 1 error information messages A 1 exiting the program 1 7 4 2 4 3 4 15 4 16 features 1 2 file size 1 13 3 14 file size limit 2 17 information sources 1 4 operations 1 8 prompt 1 6 1 10 1 13 1 14 2 7 2 21 3 6 3 31 B 1 record limit 2 17 regular expressions 3 22 runstring 1 2 1 6 1 8 1 11 2 7 2 10 3 3 3 34 3 47 B 3 screen error message 2 12 screen mode 4 61 security 3 48 session options 2 20 3 25 4 72 B 2 tutorial 2 1 work area 1 8 3 48 editing a new file 2 9 an existing file 2 9 line mode 1 2 1 10 3 31 3 33 modes 1 10 3 8 screen mode 1 2 1 11 2 4 2 10 3 34 B 3 text 3 36 end EDIT 2 8 2 17 end of file characters 1 13 2 21 display 2 11 entering line commands from screen mode 2 20 screen mode 2 10 text 1 10 2 7 EOF See end of file ER command 1 7 2 7 2 9 2 17 2 35 3
93. 4 3 35 overflow protection 3 35 read and write 2 11 size show 3 35 wrap around 2 12 Screen S command 2 10 Screen Default SD option 2 11 3 27 3 35 Screen line Limit SL option 3 27 screen mode command 1 11 commands 4 61 control key combinations 2 14 3 36 4 61 copy block of text 4 6 defaults 4 67 definition B 3 description 1 10 1 11 2 10 3 34 double execution of control keys 2 15 editing 1 2 1 11 2 4 2 10 3 34 4 61 editing commands 2 37 entering 4 61 error message 2 12 3 42 4 66 exiting 2 11 2 17 2 21 3 34 3 42 line commands 2 20 3 36 line marks 2 23 2 24 maximum lines 2 11 move block of text 4 9 quit 3 38 4 63 single execution of control keys 2 15 SD option 2 11 3 27 SE command 2 7 2 11 3 25 3 29 3 36 4 69 5 8 search and exchange commands 3 24 limit 2 32 range 2 31 window 3 18 5 8 5 9 search and replace See pattern exchange Y com mand searching for a pattern 2 31 2 41 security 3 48 security code 1 13 A 5 sequence numbers command 4 92 setting line length 3 3 lines to minimum length 5 24 options 2 7 2 40 3 29 4 69 tabs 4 75 time and date 4 77 SH ALL command See SH command SH command 2 11 2 20 2 21 2 23 3 29 4 72 Show SH command 2 11 Single Exchange S option 3 24 SL option 2 11 3 27 sophisticated pattern matching 3 22 sophisticated search and exchange 3 22 source file 1 2 1 8 2 25 3 6 3 10 3 11 3 50 4 21 B 3
94. 4 range 2 28 B 3 range specification 2 28 2 31 3 12 specification 2 22 3 13 3 15 B 2 specification offset 3 15 line mode 1 10 breaking lines 3 33 character editing 3 31 4 11 4 55 4 56 commands 2 38 commands from screen mode 2 18 2 20 3 36 control commands 3 31 deleting text 3 33 editing 1 2 1 10 3 31 examples 3 33 extending lines 3 33 inserting text 3 33 replacing text 3 33 single line screen edit 4 57 tabs 3 32 truncating lines 3 33 Line Number N command 2 21 linespec 3 15 List L command 2 22 list file closing 3 7 4 20 definition B 2 description 4 41 posting 3 7 listing EDIT commands 2 20 text 2 22 to a printer 2 22 3 9 window of text 2 22 literal pattern matching 2 33 5 2 5 4 LN command 4 45 logical unit number B 2 LU command 4 47 LU number B 2 M command 2 30 3 16 4 49 MA option 4 72 manual conventions 1 3 mark B 2 Mark Line Kx command 2 23 marking lines 2 23 2 28 4 38 match pattern 2 34 B 2 Merge M command 2 30 4 49 merging files 2 30 4 49 metacharacter See also Regular Expressions RE alphanumeric transition 5 3 5 16 beginning anchor 5 3 5 7 5 9 break line character lt gt 5 18 character class xyz 5 3 5 10 definition 2 33 3 18 3 22 5 2 B 2 descriptions 5 7 ending anchor 5 3 5 9 exchange 5 5 indefinite character 5 3 5 9 5 15 line break character lt gt 5 3 lowercase tagged string r
95. 4 92 EDIT prompt 2 7 3 32 character See anchor character B command 3 32 C command 2 20 2 21 3 31 D command 2 37 F command 2 15 2 21 T command 3 31 K command 2 28 Q command 2 17 R command 2 37 3 31 S command 2 16 3 31 T command 2 15 3 32 U command 2 17 2 21 X command 2 16 3 32 command separator See command separator lt gt break line metacharacter 5 18 A A Abort command 1 7 1 8 1 13 2 8 4 2 abort and save work file 1 7 EDIT program 1 7 1 8 1 13 2 24 Abort and Save AS command See AS command AC option 3 25 accessing a file 3 8 3 11 EDIT 1 6 next screen 2 15 previous screen 2 15 screen mode 2 10 acknowledge control character 3 26 adding text 2 12 adding text to end of lines 5 22 All A option 2 32 3 24 anchor B 1 anchor character 1 15 2 33 3 18 3 25 5 2 append option 4 41 appending a file 4 41 a line 4 97 text 3 6 4 92 4 97 AS command 1 7 3 47 4 3 AS option 3 25 Asking AS option 1 14 3 25 asterisk command See comment command asterisk line specification 3 15 B B command 2 31 3 18 4 4 backspace 3 31 base line specification See line specifications base line specification default 3 15 batch mode 3 3 3 49 batch operation 1 10 BC command 4 6 BE option 3 25 Bell BE option 3 25 BK command 4 8 block copy 4 6 block move 4 9 BM command 4 9 breaking a l
96. 42 EDIT 1000 Commands LE Line Length Uses Use to display the length of a line in total number of characters spaces and trailing blanks included Command LE Default Command linespec 1 LE Syntax linespec 1 Optional line number Enter to list the line length of a specific line Default is the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks All trailing blanks are included in the length reported by the LE command To delete all trailing blanks use the BK Kill Trailing Blanks and Truncate Lines command Examples Figure 4 28 illustrates the use of the LE command to check the length of the current pending line the line displayed has 5 trailing blanks 123456789012345678901234567890 This is the pending line LE 30 Figure 4 28 LE Line Length Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 43 Ll List Lines in File Uses Use to display the total number of lines in a file Command LI Syntax Remarks The LI command can be entered at any location in the file to display the total number of lines in the work file Examples Figure 4 29 illustrates the use of the LI command to list the number of lines in a file ii 1529 Figure 4 29 LI List Lines in File Command Example 4 44 EDIT 1000 Commands LN List Lines with Line Numbers Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 max lis
97. 6 3 46 4 16 erasing errors 3 31 3 46 error message descriptions 1 15 message display format 1 10 3 12 3 45 messages 3 42 3 48 A 1 recovery 3 45 3 46 3 48 line mode errors 1 11 3 31 screen mode error 2 12 screen mode message 1 12 2 12 ESC 4 CTRL B 3 37 4 62 escape character 3 19 3 32 5 4 B 2 Escape Character EC option 3 26 escaping screen mode 1 11 2 21 Exchange G command 2 34 Exchange X command 2 34 Exchange and Search Y command See Y com mand exchanging patterns 2 34 2 42 exchanging text 3 19 execution confirmation See dangerous command confirmation Exit and Create EC command 2 9 Exit and Replace ER command 2 7 2 9 exiting EDIT 1 7 4 2 4 3 4 15 4 16 saving 2 9 2 17 without saving 2 8 screen mode 1 11 2 17 3 42 F F command 2 23 2 31 3 18 3 46 4 18 FCL command 3 7 3 9 3 10 4 20 FCS command 3 10 4 21 FI command 2 9 2 24 3 8 3 46 4 22 file descriptor 1 13 2 24 3 34 extent 4 16 line limit 3 14 merging 2 30 naming conventions 3 11 namr 1 13 B 2 See also filename specification posting 3 7 size 4 74 size limit 2 17 3 14 truncation 1 13 type extension 3 11 File Input FI command 2 9 File Manager FMGR 2 7 3 11 3 12 filename 3 4 default 3 11 display 2 11 in EDIT runstring 2 7 parameters 1 13 specification 1 13 Find B command 2 31 Find F command 2 31 finding a pattern 2 31 3 18 4 4 4 18 FM
98. Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Line order patched at line n Error message displayed after recovery operation indicating that the recovery file is not consistent and that EDIT started duplicating lines at the line number displayed Use the A Abort command to abort the recovery if the file is expendable or examine the file for duplicate lines around the line number displayed in the error message For more information refer to the Recovering From Errors section in Chapter 3 No changes allowed during recover mode Error message displayed when user attempts to modify a file when EDIT is running a recovery operation The purpose of the recovery is to reconstruct a work file that was being edited when EDIT was abnormally terminated Exit EDIT to terminate the recovery operation To exit EDIT use an EC Exit and Create command to create a copy of the recovered file or use an A Abort command to delete the recovered file or if you are unsure whether to save the work file or abort and would like to consult the System Manager use an AS Abort and Save Work File command to postpone the decision If the AS command is used the recovery operation is executed again the next time EDIT is run No help for lt command option gt Use for general help Message displayed when there is no help available for the command or option entered after the H
99. All EDIT 1000 errors and the most common RTE system errors are described in detail in Appendix A Error and Information Messages When EDIT receives a command it does not understand it reprints the entry followed on the next line by a question mark in column one EDIT places a caret under the questionable field Error and informational messages are displayed starting in column one to differentiate them from listings of the file text In the following example a Find F command was entered to locate the word bicycle The range of lines specified line 2 to line 1 was illegal because the start of the range line 2 was larger than the end of the range line 1 EDIT repeated the erroneous command printed a question mark and a caret to indicate the location of the error and displayed an error message Start gt stop in column 1 GR sey 2 1 bicycle N Start gt stop Mistakes can be easily corrected while editing because EDIT s online quick reference is always available with information on the command syntax the purpose of each command and the command defaults In addition EDIT supplies a command stack for modifying and re executing commands and an undo command UN that reverses the effects of the command previously executed Finally EDIT requires execution confirmation in the form of the OK prompt for all commands that delete or significantly alter data Error and informational messages are further describe
100. BV Goce Ne EE ah Ne Sacre td ot bor E Gt Sane BR et sone etn 4 77 AR GEB KIN pe a veep ee ore oe eles por eed Stes he alse en ie ad SS er eS 4 78 AS he the else tae A ca de BE NED 4 79 U Unconditional Exchange 2 0 cw s4 Isapre pi Ia phase es eaee ees Oo ews 4 81 RUIN UWI gt a ote te ot het Ne ie tee teh he es e a he pad 4 83 UY Undo List Yank ack tthe os lt Bg Bee ok dl a lento es dal Malt aioe ate dine Bis LA 4 84 W List WindOW esce esnan Sins e ue tek eee eee eee ad werent 4 85 WC Create File without Exit socia a 4 86 WE Write and Replace oir a ests cen eee ey ee oad 4 87 X Exchange oran ten arene donee a a e ie Sele Meee ett aid 4 88 Y Exchange and Search eiii dd ta dt sena 4 90 EDIT 1000 Non Alphanumeric Commands 2 0 0 cor 4 92 eA Sequence NUMBERS iaa dl pride qe daras 4 93 Online Quick Reference oeni ne odres iaa e 4 94 T Display source Fille Stats unida ide a EEDA 4 95 PeConmmand Stack 13 oo Soe A EA A A A 4 96 lt space Appenda Line lazo pe eiee pokes gad raid Pa 4 97 2 UREDCAL nce athe ce a aa a Shee ee eRe eee tEadee eee tue eres as 4 98 Comment a riores iu Ee AE E ELA ETA AAA AAA AS 4 100 Chapter 5 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Tntrod ction A ES yb niet EA AA EAN 5 1 Using Regular EXPTESSION SV A A A 5 2 Introduction to Regular Expressions ooo dao rea a ia 5 2 Literal Matching 25 5 scones eateey ti bea 5 4 Escape Character E EE EE A Si aye Seats 5 4 Shortest and Longest Possible Matchi
101. Brackets Before entering text in the screen mode you must insert blank lines between the screen brackets using the insert line INS LINE key on your terminal keyboard As you type in text use a carriage return after each line and do not type over or delete either the top or bottom screen bracket After entering text you must exit the screen mode To create the new file you use a line mode command to save the new file and exit the EDIT program Getting Started Tutorial 2 5 Table 2 1 EDIT 1000 Quick Start Exercise INSTRUCTIONS 1 Start the EDIT program from the RTE A Cl 1 At the Cl gt prompt enter the ED T user interface prompt Cl gt command a space and the file name NEWFILE Then press the carriage return CI gt edit newfile 2 Enter the EDIT screen mode At the EDIT prompt enter the S Screen command followed by a carriage return s 3 Type your name 23 times each time on Using the cursor arrow keys on your a different line terminal position the cursor on the bot tom screen bracket Use the INS LINE key on your terminal to insert 25 blank lines between the top and bottom screen brackets Type your name followed by a carriage return Repeat 22 times 4 Go back to the first line of the text Enter the Control P command to go to the previous screen as follows Press and hold the CTRL key on your terminal keyboard then press the P key Release both keys and press the car riage r
102. EDIT s tab settings may not always be synchronized What is displayed on the terminal may be quite different from what is stored in EDIT Use the TS and TL commands to ensure that the two are synchronized Care should be exercised when using the backspace key while in line mode When backspace is used the terminal may show that the cursor moved back only one character but if the last key stroke entered was a tab stop the tab stop is deleted Examples Figure 4 40 illustrates the use of the T command Note that the header line has been shifted left to illustrate the column positions set by the tab commands In actuality the header line is displayed starting in column 2 FN EIS A ERNE ETL PELE MOL AOS EE REE ASNE E EGE MME SE LOEO E MoD ETE E AAE E TER t10 20 30 40 T T T TITTET ELTETETIETLTECLCILECTTLTITILETLETTITELIT E T T T TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT PLELTITTITTTITIIITTTITT TIT TITI TT e TTITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITITIT ITLITITITITITICTITEIATITTTITTITAITTTTT T T T T TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT Figure 4 40 T Set Tabs Command Examples 4 76 EDIT 1000 Commands TI Time Uses Use in line mode to add the time and date to the current pending line Command TI1 Default Command linespec 1 TI n Syntax linespec 1 Optional line specification Specifies which line is to be stamped with the time data Default is the pending line Refer to the s
103. EGMENT AND DO A GO Instructional message displayed as a result of an internal error in the EDIT 1000 program Consult with System Manager Resume EDIT on lt filename gt Informational message displayed when a run operation initiated by the RU Run command is complete The source file name is displayed at the position of lt filename gt None required Segment load error for ED Tx Error message displayed as a result of an internal error in the EDIT 1000 program The segment number is provided in the position of EDITx Consult with System Manager Setting terminal straps to d g I T Informational message indicating that your terminal is not strapped correctly for the EDIT 1000 program and that EDIT is attempting to programmatically re strap the terminal None required A 10 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Size Edit up Error message indicating that the EDIT 1000 program has not been loaded properly See the System Manager Sorry no help File EDIT HLP not found Error message displayed when EDIT cannot locate the help file Indicates that the EDIT program has not been installed properly See the System Manager Start and or stop line not found O saves original text written to screen S saves text just read from screen B saves both inserts screen text
104. FCS File Close Source command closes the current source file while allowing you continued access to the work file This is convenient for those situations when the file is being edited but must also be accessed by another program or when changes made to the work file are not to be saved and you wish to ensure that entering an ER or WR will not alter the original source file The FCL File Close List command is used to close a list file that has been created by using the L List or K Kill commands When the L or K commands are used the list file that is created or appended remains open until another L or K command is used with a specified filename or the EDIT session is terminated or the FCL command is used If you wish to access the list file to check the list operation or to edit the list file the list file must first be closed and then re opened The FCL command allows the list file to be closed without leaving the EDIT session Note Deleting Files File Naming Defaults If the list file is a device such as a line printer use the FCL command to close and release the file as soon as you have completed the listing The device will be unavailable to other system users while EDIT has it open for a list file You may delete the contents of a file while in EDIT but the file itself cannot be deleted from within the EDIT session Files must be deleted from the RTE user interface CI or FMGR by using the Purge PU command No
105. IT 1000 screen mode enables you to see several lines of text in relation to each other and allows you to use the local terminal keys to add and delete text But what about moving text copying text searching for specific strings and displaying system information These editing functions are accomplished using the powerful EDIT 1000 line mode commands EDIT provides a control key combination that is used from screen mode to execute line mode commands The C key combination enables you to escape the screen mode to execute one line mode command After execution of the command you are returned to the pending line To try the C command use the EDIT runstring from the RTE user interface CI or FMGR to start a new edit session with your file TESTFILE Use the S Screen command to access the screen mode Now use the C command followed by a carriage return Note that the line mode prompt a slash is displayed on the line following the current cursor location The following sections of this tutorial describe some of the line mode commands that you may wish to execute from screen mode For now use the carriage return to return to the screen mode The C command is recommended when you wish to execute one line mode command that does not display information that you need to read If you want to enter more than one line mode command or if you want to display information use the U command If you use the CC command EDIT does not read
106. IT commands entered during any one session The list is accessible with the command stack command command string The various fields entered in an EDIT command These are typically the additional EDIT commands the optional or required line specifications pattern and exchange fields and command options control character A non printing character entered by pressing both the CTRL key and the appropriate character Control characters are used as sub commands in line and screen mode editing current prompt The EDIT prompt character in effect Default is a slash It may be changed using the SE PC command described in Chapter 3 Glossary B 1 default The initial or reset condition for an optional parameter in the EDIT command string delimiter A character used to separate command and parameters Required for some commands and optional for others escape character A character used to revert a character with special meaning to its original meaning line specification Parameters that specify one line or a range of lines Usually they precede certain commands Special characters may be used to indicate offsets These characters may be checked online with LS list file A file created or opened by the L and K commands Specified number of lines may be written to or appended to the list file logical unit number A number referred to as LU used by the operating system to identify an I O device marks Alphabetic line labe
107. IT runs a recovery operation referred to as recovery mode the next time it is run to allow any editing not saved before the abnormal termination to be written to a permanent file During the recovery mode an attempt is made to reconstruct the internal tables from information contained in the work file This allows the data to be checked with the List or Find commands or to be written to a file with the EC Exit and Create or ER Exit and Replace command If unable to reconstruct any of the internal tables EDIT asks you if it is OK to purge the work file You should answer yes If EDIT is able to reconstruct the work file you must save it with an EC or ER command or purge it with an A command before editing can be done If you wish to leave the work file unchanged you can used the AS Abort and Save Work File command If EDIT finds inconsistencies in the work file it attempts to correct them Depending on the nature of the inconsistencies EDIT may or may not be successful In any event do not write over the original file with the recovered version without making a comparison between the two files The recovery mode can be terminated only by exiting EDIT While in the recovery mode the work file cannot be changed If the EDIT session is aborted in the recovery mode the work file is purged If the work file must be saved or you happened to enter the recover mode for someone else s file and do not know if it is OK to delete th
108. If SCRATCH is not large enough EDIT 1000 will not create the file report an error and terminate If SCRATCH is on RAM disk EDIT will purge the file off of SCRATCH and attempts to create the file on directory SCRATCHEDIT If SCRATCHEDIT does not exist the file will be put back on the SCRATCH directory This action is taken to allow the SCRATCH directory to be put on the RAM disk while still protecting EDIT s recover mode It is assumed that a RAM disk will not survive a reboot For this reason if you put SCRATCH on a RAM disk it is recommended that you create a SCRATCHEDIT directory on a real disk If SCRATCH does not exist EDIT puts the work file on the FMGR scratch cartridge specified in SCRN The default value of SCRN is 0 default to top cartridge in crn list SCRN can be changed by the BOOTEX SC command Refer to the RTE A System Generation and Installation Manual part number 92077 90034 Usually 512 blocks depending on the amount of space available in the SCRATCH directory or the top FMGR cartridge The work file is automatically extended if more room is needed Loading EDIT 1000 C 3 RTE 6 VM Work File Considerations C 4 EDIxx Eylxx SCRATCH crn size Loading EDIT 1000 Under RTE 6 VM the work file takes one of the following three forms the first is the CI file system format the second is the single CPU FMGR file system format and the third is the multiple CPU FMGR
109. L keys The line character edit options are briefly described following For more information refer to the Line Mode Character Editing section in Chapter 3 Break line at cursor move remaining text to next line Delete characters Replace characters Insert character Same function as CTRL S Frees CTRL S to be used with Xoff protocols Truncate line Extend line adding characters to the end of the line A non printing escape character It is the same as but it does not print It cannot be redefined Current prompt default preserves corresponding character The Undo UN command reverses the P command After execution of the command EDIT re displays the edited line as the current pending line For examples see the section on Line Mode Editing in Chapter 3 Q Single Line Screen Mode Edit Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 Remarks Long Line Editing Use from line mode to allow the use of the local terminal keys to edit the current pending line Displays the pending line with the screen cursor positioned at that line Referred to as the single line screen mode command because the cursor arrow keys delete and insert keys can be used to edit the pending line The edited line is placed in the work file when the carriage return is pressed Q linespec 1 Q Optional line specification Indicates the line to be edited If omitted the command edits the current pending line
110. Remarks The header line is extended or shortened to be the same length as the pending line 4 32 EDIT 1000 Commands I Insert Line Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 lt line character edits gt Remarks Examples 1 LN 00001 Mission 00002 on today EOF 2 i Impossible 1 LN 00001 Mission 00002 00003 on today EOF Use in line mode to insert a line of text above the current pending line Inserts a line above any line specified in the command string lt line character edits gt linespec 1 I lt line character edits gt Optional line specification Line is inserted above the line specified Default inserts a line above the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Line mode character edit text to be inserted If text is not entered command inserts a zero length blank line For more information refer to the Line Character Editing section of Chapter 3 After the insert EDIT displays the current pending line which is the line you were positioned on when the insert was executed The I command allows you to insert text before line one of the work file The UN Undo command can be used to reverse the I command Figure 4 23 illustrates the use of the I command to insert a line of text above the pending line line 2 The LN List Numbered command is used before and after the change
111. SE QU OF command The quiet option also implies an affirmative response to all dangerous command prompts that is OK The Recover option instructs EDIT to begin a recovery operation on the work file of the filename entered in the runstring See section on Recovering From Errors in this chapter The S option specifies the work file directory to access In the following example the Batch option B initiates a batch editing operation on the file WARM TXT and turns on the quiet option so that nothing is listed to the terminal during the operation The Transfer TR command instructs EDIT to read commands from the file COOL CMD CI gt RAMO taa O NEO EDIT commands can be entered in the runstring after the filename When more than one command is specified in the EDIT runstring they must be separated by command separators The default character for the command separator is the vertical bar although it can be set to any other non alphanumeric character except a space or a comma The number of commands allowed is limited to the line length For example the command used to edit the existing file TESTFILE in the screen mode with the Case Folding option set to OFF would be entered as CT gt Edi Testi Some O ls Note that a space a comma or a command separator default is used to separate the filename from the EDIT run command EDIT and from the command string Commands entered with the runstring have the same forma
112. T Regular Expressions EDIT 1000 Operations 3 23 Search and Exchange Command Options 3 24 EDIT 1000 Operations EDIT provides a wide variety of find and exchange command options that you can use to alter the effect of a command The applicable commands include Find B and F Delete D and Exchange G X and Y The parameters valid for each command are included in the command syntax provided in Chapter 4 of this manual They include The All option is entered to apply the command to all lines where the specified pattern was matched This option is valid for the B E and D commands The Reverse pattern option is entered to apply the search command to all lines that do not contain the specified pattern This option is valid for the B E and D commands The Quiet option is entered to suppress a listing of the lines affected by the command This option is valid for all search and exchange commands The No Window option is entered to disregard the horizontal window columns setting and allow a match to the specified pattern anywhere on a line This option is valid on all search and exchange commands The Remove option is entered to remove lines that are blank zero length after an exchange Valid for the G X and Y commands The Single Exchange option is entered with an exchange command to allow only one exchange per line at the left most match Valid for the G X and Y commands EDIT Session Options EDIT 1000 provides
113. TE PEA AA IAEA AE CEI SESE SE Figure 4 16 Box Before Using Fill Fill instruction sefl 5 50 50 Sets up the columns a ib fl Fills the box Figure 4 17 Example of Fill Instruction 4 24 EDIT 1000 Commands Example of a box after using Fill 1 This is text of a box A test to see if the 1 2 fi11 code will actually work These lines 192 3 need to be filled We also have numbers to aes 4 keep track of the lines Eb 6 4 5 6 RO AE E AS ES AE T A AS AA AS RSU O E OR E i Figure 4 18 Box After Using Fill EDIT 1000 Commands 4 25 G Character Exchange on Pending Line Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 pattern substitute N 4 26 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to search for a pattern and exchange it with a new pattern within the line range specified in the command string e Use with RE Regular Expressions set to ON to use the metacharacters for pattern matching Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on Regular Expressions G lt last exchange and substitute gt linespec 1 linespec 2 G pattern substitute N R S Optional A line range may be specified for this command using either absolute line numbers separated by a space or comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications If no range is specified the exchange a
114. Tagged string braces Use to indicate a string to be recalled in a different location on the line New location is indicated by amp n in the substitute string of the exchange command Tagged string recall Use on the substitute side of an exchange command to recall a tagged string see above in a new position the n th position of the line 1 lt n lt 9 amp by itself recalls the entire original string Tagged string recall in uppercase Same as amp n but shifts recalled string to uppercase Tagged string recall in lowercase Same as amp n but shifts recalled string to lowercase Line break character Use to break a line into two lines at the position of the metacharacter EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 3 Literal Matching When EDIT 1000 is using literal matching any literal character in a pattern matches that same character in the text being scanned A sequence of literal characters such as XYZZY matches text in a scanned line if the line contains the same sequence For example the command F xyzzy would match the characters surrounded by boxes in the following text abcd xy22y aero qwert asdf hgijkl vbnm xyzy xyZZy ARRA ab xyzzy cd abcd dcba Figure 5 1 Example of Literal Matching The first line illustrates that the literal characters are matched at any position on the line The second line shows that both upper and lowercase versions of alphabetic characters match the pattern EDIT provides
115. Used inside of patterns and line character edits to remove any special meaning from the next character Indefinite match or wildcard character Used in patterns to specify zero or more occurrences of any character Maximum number of characters allowed per line EDIT Prompt character Quiet mode Set to ON to run EDIT without listing any output to the terminal When EDIT prompts for input quiet mode automatically turns off If you interactively set quiet mode on it looks as if nothing happened since EDIT will prompt for the next command and turn off quiet mode Regular expressions Set to ON to allow the use of Regular Expressions mode metacharacters in special pattern searches matches Find return ON causes a search command F or B to return to the original pending line after reaching the second line specification OFF causes EDIT to leave the pending line at one line beyond the second line specification entered 4 70 EDIT 1000 Commands Table 4 1 EDIT Session Options continued a O 10 10 2 Screen size defaults Numbers indicate screen format Lists number of lines displayed above pending line number of lines displayed below pending line and the number of lines overlapped displayed from the previous screen from one screen to the next as a result of CTRL P or CTRL F commands Screen size is equal to the sum of the first and second number plus one Screen mode line limit Sets the maximum number of lines that are
116. Xon Xoff handshake protocol Same as CTRL S except a large screen is provided Size of screen is determined by amount of terminal memory available Check size available with the SH SL command Same as CTRL Q Use for terminals with Xon Xoff handshake protocol Saves screen edits and quits screen mode Double to ignore new edits Should not be used if your terminal uses Xon Xoff handshake protocol If your terminal follows Xon Xoff handshake protocol CTRL Q and CTRL S are not interpreted as EDIT commands Use CTRL U in place of CTRL Q and CTRL T instead of CTRL S The control D CTRL D mode is a submode of screen mode editing that adds some line graphic editing commands in to screen mode CTRL D mode can be enabled by typing either CTRL D plus carriage return while in screen mode or by typing the SE CD set control D command In either case display functions will be turned off Once CTRL D is enabled it stays enabled until it is disabled with another SE CD command When CTRL D mode is enabled screen mode back spaces are destructive and DEL or rub outs echo followed by a carriage return linefeed The edit display functions flag will be set to OFF when control D mode is enabled and should be left off while CTRL D mode is being used To use the line drawing features of CTRL D mode your terminal must have the line drawing character set ROM installed and enabled usually it is enabled with the sequence escape right parenthesis
117. Y command nor does it restore the file to 1ts original state before use of the command that created the undo list In some cases use of the UN command after the UY command may also delete data Figure 4 46 illustrates the use of the UY command to retrieve lines 1 through 20 of the undo list inserting them at the end of the file AS uy 1 20 Figure 4 46 UY Undo List Yank Command Example 4 84 EDIT 1000 Commands W List Window Uses e Use from line mode to list a vertical window Displays the text within the window This command does not move the pending line e Use the WU version of this command to list vertical window without line numbering Turns off the display of numbers for succeeding W commands e Use the WN version of this command to list line numbers Turns on the display of numbers for succeeding W commands Command 10 20 W Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 W Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 Optional vertical window range Enter either absolute line numbers separated by a space or comma or any of the line specification characters If omitted linespec 1 defaults to list 10 lines above the pending line and linespec 2 defaults to list the first line specification and the next 20 lines Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks To view the current vertical window setting use the SH VW Show Vertical Window command The mark
118. a Case Folding option that can be set so that EDIT searches are case sensitive using the SE CF OFF command The starting characters on the third line do not match the pattern string because the fourth characters of the pattern and text are different The highlighted matches on the third line show that pattern matching is case insensitive at all positions not just the first letter of the pattern or text The fourth line illustrates that matching occurs at any character boundary The matched characters do not need to be surrounded by spaces or other punctuation However no pattern can match text that extends across a line boundary Escape Character EDIT 1000 also provides a provision for the literal matching of a character that also happens to be a metacharacter The backslash is the escape character that is entered before a metacharacter to indicate to EDIT that the character is to be literally matched The escape character is an option that can be changed using the SE Set command For example to specify a literal sign enter For a literal backslash use 5 4 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Shortest and Longest Possible Matching Exchange Command Characters Regular Expression Length The choice of whether to use search and exchange commands with Regular Expressions ON or OFF is determined by your needs If you have a simple pattern to match or exchange and prefer to do it quickly Regular Expressions OFF is defini
119. ab kill transfer undo undo list yank list window write create write replace exchange X then F sequence repeat help command stack lt space gt append line pattern information regular expressions line specifications line specs line number forward n backward n backward n current line line spec 1 last line gt last line gt forward find backward find x marked line special chars indefinite anchor escape cmd separator RM recover mode AB abort msgs RO run options Figure 4 20 EDIT Online Quick Reference Summary Menu Examples For more information on EDIT 1000 s online quick reference refer to the applicable sections in Chapters 1 and 3 If the H mnemonic is used enter a space or comma between the H and the command for which reference is being requested For example use H CO or H CO If the is used a space or comma is not necessary The command displays information about the current EDIT session Figure 4 21 illustrates the use of the H or command to display help for the D Delete command the HL Header Line command and the Help command The final example is actually the Display Source File Status command EDIT 1000 Commands 4 29 Cl 1 D pattern A V Q N Delete lines until pattern is found Deleted lines are flagged with a tilde and lines that are not deleted are listed with line numbers If the first li
120. age Stop start line s not found O Saves original text written to screen S Saves text just read from screen B Saves both inserts screen text before original text What should be saved Enter O to save the work file as originally written to the screen S to replace the work file content originally written to the screen with the text that EDIT read in as it rolled it across the screen or B to save both the original work file contents and insert the new text read in If unsure of what should be saved B is the safest action The Undo UN command cannot be used to reverse the S command You must exit the screen mode by using one of the applicable control key combinations While in screen mode EDIT locks the terminal LU and disables interrupt processing from the terminal If you are using EDIT on the system console it is not locked and any system messages overwrite your text While EDIT is reading the screen it locks your terminal s keyboard so that any keys that you strike are ignored Note that the HP 2621 terminal does not support keyboard locking so be careful not to strike any keys while the screen is being written to or read Use n S where n is any line number or line specification character from line mode to start a screen at a specific line Screen Mode Defaults Examples gt gt RKAKKKK kxk kk kx kkxkxk xx KkKKK kk To view screen mode defaults enter SH SD Show Screen Defaults
121. al line specification followed by a command mnemonic or character which is followed by one or more optional parameters The syntax used for the command parameters is dependent on the specific command entered Chapter 4 provides the parameter syntax for each EDIT command The syntax for line specifications is not dependent on the command entered However not all commands permit the use of line specifications and some commands allow the entry of only one line specification The syntax for line specifications is covered later in this chapter An asterisk in the first column of a command is interpreted as a comment and EDIT ignores the rest of the text on that line EDIT has a default line length of 256 characters If your output device supports a shorter maximum line length you can shorten the EDIT line length to prevent possible line truncations when the file is used For instructions on how to set the line length after EDIT is initiated refer to the EDIT Session Options section of this chapter or to the description of the Set SE command in Chapter 4 For instructions on increasing or decreasing the line length via the runstring refer to the description of the runstring in this chapter Regular Expression operators are limited in length to 256 characters see the Regular Expression Length section in Chapter 5 for more information EDIT 1000 Operations 3 13 File Size Limit 3 14 EDIT 1000 Operations The EDIT program can be
122. all of the EDIT segments before running EDIT Loading EDIT 1000 C 5 EDIT 1000 in a Multipoint Environment Q and O Commands In a multipoint environment several considerations apply to EDIT operations A terminal is defined to be in a multipoint environment if its I O is being processed through driver DVRO7 To determine if a terminal is operating under multipoint observe the transmit break light on the terminal If it is blinking intermittently the terminal is probably a multipoint terminal When EDIT is invoked from a multipoint terminal several actions are performed for the user The intrinsic tab function of the terminal is enabled the editor s tab character CTRL I remains on The INSERT CHAR DELETE CHAR and CLEAR DISPLAY keys on the terminal are enabled for use as editing functions Note that the EDIT commands to insert and delete lines should be used not the INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE keys on the terminal Finally since the CONTROL and ESCAPE keys do not work in a multipoint environment the Q and O commands rather than the edit commands explained in the preceding sections of this manual should be used to perform character edits It should be remembered that in a multipoint environment the ENTER key and not the carriage return is the key used to transmit text to the multipoint controller Furthermore the characters that EDIT will process are usually delimited by the left margin on the left and the current curso
123. ample of screen display following In addition the beginning line displays the command used to exit the screen mode and the ending line displays the file descriptor of the file being edited If the file descriptor is too long to display in its entirety EDIT displays a portion of the file descriptor followed by three dots 10 20 S linespec 1 linespec 2 S Optional first line of screen If omitted default for first line of screen is 10 lines above the pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Optional line range that defines the last line of the screen If omitted default for last line displayed is 20 lines below the first line displayed Once in screen mode you may use terminal keys and control CTRL keys to edit text Although terminal keys vary between terminal models they usually include cursor arrow keys and insert and delete keys for characters and lines Sixteen control key combinations are available on all terminals that support screen mode Q U P R E S T X C O K A Z J B and D The CTRL key and alphabetic key are pressed simultaneously and are followed by a carriage return Many of the control commands save new edits when they are executed To execute the command but ignore new edits double the command For example CTRL U quits screen mode saving new edits whereas CTRL U CTRL U quits screen mode and ignores any
124. ams in many languages for example BASIC FORTRAN Macro Pascal and Ada Text for documents such as memos letters program notes or manuscripts EDIT 1000 Basics 1 1 EDIT 1000 Features 1 2 EDIT 1000 Basics EDIT 1000 is designed to increase your productivity in program development and text preparation or modification As with any software tool the command syntax and the program operation must be understood to take full advantage of the capabilities of the program One of the features of the EDIT 1000 program is that for existing files EDIT allows you to edit a copy of the file referred to as your work file so as to preserve your source file When the work file is edited to your satisfaction it can be used to update the source file Additional features of the EDIT 1000 program follow e A simple runstring that can be expanded to include EDIT commands as you become more experienced e Over 50 one or two character commands most of which are named mnemonically to aid in recall e Prompts that require you to confirm the execution of commands that delete or significantly alter data e Acommand the Undo command that allows you to reverse the effect of the last command executed e Aline editing mode that enables you to operate EDIT on a terminal that does not support block mode e Special line mode commands that enable you to use the local terminal keys to edit text while in line mode e A screen mode that enable
125. anges the following lines in the sample text TESTFILE 00001 Edit 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers 00002 develop software quickly and accurately with minimal effort Edit 00008 Edit 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is Figure 2 19 Example of Output for x EDIT Edit a Command 2 34 Getting Started Tutorial ls q Repeating a Previous Command q Exiting amp Saving ER If you tried this command out on TESTFILE be sure to Set Case Folding to ON before continuing If you are sure of the change and do not need to see a listing of the affected lines following the exchange you can either use the G command or use the Q Quiet option with the X command For example to change all occurrences of Hewlet to Hewlett without a listing of the affected lines a pretty safe bet enter the command 1 x Hewlet Hewlett q At this point you are ready for a shortcut EDIT provides a command stack feature that enables you to repeat a previously executed command without retyping The command stack command lists the last 20 commands used during the EDIT session To use the command enter the slash mark from the line mode and press the carriage return The command stack is listed Locate the cursor under the desired command and press the carriage return The command is executed You can also use this feature to execute a version of a previously executed command Do
126. ank character in the paragraph Indentation may be either positive or negative The Fill command will put one blank between words except in the case where sentence ending punctuation is followed by a capital letter in which case two blanks are inserted The punctuation and capital letter will be seen even if hidden by single or double quotes However the Fill command will not put in two blanks where only one is currently in the line for example Dr Foo will not be changed Fill command format FL Q R 1 Options Q Quiet operation don t list changed lines R Remove indentation overrides current SE IN value I Leave indentation overrides current SE IN value Advanced feature Fill allows you to fill text in boxes The boxes may be either standard character set boxes or alternate character set boxes In order to do this Fill counts escape and control sequences and attempts to use column numbers as they appear on the screen In the case of line drawing boxes the ON and OFF control should be immediately before and after each edge otherwise the Fill command may assume that they are part of the text to be filled Note that extra control characters may confuse the Fill command EDIT 1000 Operations 3 43 Example of a box before using Fill 1 This is text of a box A 2 A test to see if the fill 2 3 code will actually work These lines need 3 4lto be filled We also hav
127. any line in your file The TI command adds a 30 character field to the current pending line starting at the column specified The default starting column is column 1 Text outside the 30 character field is not affected Note the example in Figure 3 1 Current pending line AO Current pending line 8 00 AM TUE 26 MAY 1987 3 8 EDIT 1000 Operations Figure 3 1 Tl Command Example EDIT does not update the time and date information It can only be done with another TI 40 command on the same line A time stamp field can be created on any line This field is updated by the system time each time EDIT replaces the file that is EC WC ER or WR Enter the following field at the location in your file where the time stamp is to be made lt YYMMDD HHMM gt You can enter any 10 digits between the angle brackets but you must enter the brackets and the period in the position illustrated When EDIT updates the time stamp the date is displayed in the preceding format where the year month day hour and minute are each indicated with two digits For example two o clock in the afternoon July 4 1987 is represented as lt 870704 1400 gt In Figure 3 2 the file is dated by creating a dummy field in file TEST using the line mode P command and CTRL X then using the WR command to write the change to the file while still remaining in EDIT and using the FI command to re edit the file and check the time stamp This is li
128. ap To set maximum screen size in number of lines default depends on the type of terminal used To set the control D line editing graphics submode Screen Mode Control Key Combination Commands To quit screen mode To quit screen mode won t work on terminals using Xon Xoff handshake protocol To go back to previous screen To go back to previous screen note that CTRL P does not work on X 25 pad terminals To go forward to next screen To start next screen at cursor position To start next screen at cursor position won t work on terminals using Xon Xoff handshake protocol To start extra large screen at cursor position To temporarily escape screen mode to execute one EDIT line mode command and return to current screen To copy line indicated by cursor to below that line Reset margins To position cursor to set a line marker To move cursor to first character on line Reset margins To move cursor to last character on line Reset margins To join current line to following line Reset margins To break current line into two lines at the current cursor position To enter the line editing graphics submode while in screen mode CTRL U CTRL Q CTRL P CTRL R CTRL F CTRL T CTRL S CTRL X CTRL C CTRL O CTRL K CTRL A CTRL Z CTRL J ESC 4 CTRL B CTRL D NOTE Single execution of the screen mode control key commands reads and saves the edits on the current screen Double execution of the commands c
129. ational message displayed when the R option to initiate recovery is used with the EDIT runstring or when the last EDIT session was abnormally terminated Action Determine what should be saved from the recovered work file then exit EDIT A 4 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action EOF Informational message indicating that the current pending line is at the end of the file None required EOF n matches lt options gt Informational message displayed after execution of a Find B or F command or an exchange G U X Y Indicates that EDIT reached the end of the file and found the number of matches listed The number of matches or the word No is displayed at the position of the n For Finds EDIT reports the number of lines containing one or more matches For exchanges EDIT reports the number of exchanges performed If the CF Case Folding or RE Regular Expressions options were set to ON during the search a CF and or RE is displayed at the position of lt option gt None required EXEC ERROR P1 P6 A B RTN ADDRESS DATA Suspending Error messages displayed as a result of an internal error Contact your System Manager Have your System Manager off EDIT terminate the session and then use the recovery mode to recover your work file FI lt filename gt specifies file t
130. auses EDIT to ignore any new changes to the screen Getting Started Tutorial 2 37 Table 2 4 Task Chart for Line EDIT Commands Editing in Line Mode To insert a line after the pending line lt space gt To copy a block rectangle of text from one position to another BC To move a block rectangle of text from one position to another BM To edit the pending line and advance to the next line C To copy line s to after pending line To exchange a pattern on the pending line To insert a line before the pending line To pull the line below the current pending line up and join it to the end of the pending line To delete line s To move a line to after the pending line To show the pending line number To copy and edit the pending line To edit the pending line To edit the pending line locally using the terminal edit keys To replace the pending line with new text To add time and date information to a line and display line To unconditionally exchange a field To exchange patterns To exchange patterns on the pending line and advance to the next occurrence of the match pattern To break line at cursor position To delete characters To replace characters To insert characters To truncate line at cursor position To extend line 2 38 Getting Started Tutorial Table 2 5 Task Chart for Commands that Display Information Displaying Information To display a summary of commands in alphabetical order
131. before original text What should be saved Error message displayed in response to a control key combination F P S X used from the screen mode indicating that EDIT was unable to locate either the beginning or ending screen brackets or both brackets Requires user to indicate information to save by entering an O S or B Enter an O to save the screen text as originally written to the screen for this screen mode session without the most recent edits enter an S to save the text read from the screen or enter a B to save both the original screen text and the text just read from the screen If unsure as to the status of the text enter a B and then delete any duplicated lines Start gt EOF Error message referring to the line range specification entered for a command Indicates that the starting line number entered is beyond the last line of the file Check typing and or verify the line numbers of the lines to be moved copied Start gt stop Error message referring to the line range specification entered for a command Indicates that the starting line number entered is larger than the ending line number for the range Check typing Error and Information Messages A 11 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action System type of your terminal _ Prompt message displayed when EDIT cannot determine the system type durin
132. ber of characters in a line However only 79 characters are saved in the command stack The command separator does not apply inside a find or exchange pattern EDIT 1000 Operations 3 25 Table 3 3 EDIT Session Options continued option petan eserinton OOO Display functions Applies to the screen mode display of display enhancements such as blinking and inverse video and control characters When set to ON EDIT displays graphics for control characters OFF allows the terminal to interpret the control codes The control characters null line feed carriage return inquire acknowledge and delete are always removed in screen mode Escape character Used inside of patterns and line character edits to remove any special meaning from the next character For example is interpreted as a backslash not the escape character Indefinite match or wildcard character Used in patterns to specify zero or more occurrences of any character With Regular Expressions option OFF it matches the shortest possible match in a line With Regular Expressions ON it matches the longest possible match Maximum number of characters allowed per line Changing the value of LE does not affect existing lines until you modify them You can truncate lines to a maximum length by using the Set Length SE LE and Kill Trailing Blanks BK commands See also L runstring option in this chapter Prompt character Note that is also the defau
133. ber of the line after which the copied text is to be inserted For example to copy lines one through five of the sample text to the end of the file enter U to escape the screen mode enter a dollar sign at the prompt to move the current pending line to the end of the file and enter the copy command EEO To copy text by marking lines locate and mark the desired lines of text using K while in screen mode Assume that you used a and b to mark the beginning and ending lines of the text block to be copied Locate the line after which the copied text is to be inserted Position your cursor on that line and use C to open up the screen for a line mode command Now use the copy command with the line markers as follows i Ser Silo CC Now use the line marker method to copy lines one through five of TESTFILE and insert them at the end of the file 3 By now it should be clear that for screen mode editing the line marker method of copying lines is faster and easier than the line range specification method 2 28 Getting Started Tutorial Undoing Commands EDIT provides a command that allows you to reverse almost all UN the commands entered that alter or delete data with the exception of the A AS EC ER FI WC WR and UY commands The UN Undo command enables you to undo the last command executed So if you just copied the wrong block of text you can un copy it by entering the UN command from the line mode To try
134. can be checked with the SH SL Show Screen Limit command The maximum number is used for screen overflow protection If the screen size is changed to a greater number this protection is lost When moving from one screen to another EDIT overlaps screens including two lines on the second screen from the previous screen The two line overlap is the default that can be reset using the SE SD command described below For example a given screen displays lines 701 to 721 If CTRL F is used the second screen displays lines 720 to 740 and CTRL P displays lines 682 to 702 To redefine the default screen size and overlap use the SE Set command and change the SD Screen Default option EDIT 1000 Operations 3 35 Saving or Ignoring Screen Edits Line Commands from Screen Mode Editing Text 3 36 EDIT 1000 Operations To change the screen size use the SE SD Set Screen Default command Specify three numbers to indicate the number of lines above and below the pending line and the number of overlap lines For example to display a 60 line screen with a one line overlap enter se sd 30 30 1 Or to display a 30 line screen with a five line overlap use se se 20 5 In the example above the tells EDIT to use the default value for the screen size The default value for lines above the pending line is 10 EDIT uses a conservative algorithm to allocate the maximum number of lines it supports in screen mode This is done becau
135. ced on the other side of the curly brace it would have been interpreted by EDIT as the literal caret character Matching of the filename itself is accomplished with the next five characters in the pattern The instructs EDIT to match the longest possible string not containing a dot This pattern is a combination of three regular expression features First a character class is specified by the use of matching square brackets The characters to be matched are specified using the character class negation meaning anything but a dot Finally the plus instructs EDIT to match at least one and as many as possible non dot characters On the exchange side of the command the literal characters ftn7x are used followed by amp 1 The amp 1 instructs EDIT to retrieve the tagged text corresponding to the first set of curly braces and insert that text at the position of the amp 1 in the substituted text As illustrated in this example a tagged text item can be used more than once in the substitute pattern Note the two slashes at the end of the pattern used to suppress the confirmation prompt OK Issuing the preceding exchange command results in the file listed as follows ftn7x CNTLD_CMDS 0 qc print CNTLD_CMDS 1st ftn7x CNTLD_COPY_MOVE 0 qc print CNTLD_COPY_MOVE 1st ftn7x CNTLD_SUBS 0 qc print CNTLD_SUBS 1st ftn7x DO_CNTLD 0 qc print DO_CNTLD 1st To exit EDIT enter an ER Exit an
136. check the default A Optional all flag Use to delete all lines in the line range that do NOT match the pattern Displays a tilde 7 for all lines deleted Displays the total number of lines matched that is saved followed by CF case folding and RE regular expressions options if they are ON New pending line is the line below the ending range specified V Optional reverse flag Use the reverse V to delete a line containing the pattern specified When the A and V options are used together all lines in the line range that match the pattern are deleted Q Optional Enter the Q Quiet option to suppress display of lines deleted and lines matched EDIT 1000 Commands 4 13 N Optional Enter the N No window option to allow a match to the pattern anywhere on a line Otherwise pattern is matched only within the current horizontal window columns Use SH WC for the current window column search setting Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the D command Examples Figure 4 9 shows the use of the D command to delete the lines in the file up to the first line that contains the letter G to delete all lines that do not contain the letter G using a slash to suppress asking and to delete all lines that contain the letter G The LN List Numbered command displays the file prior to the delete CAN 00001 START 00002 PRINT 25 00003 GO TO 20 00004 PRINT 21 00005 GET 18 iS a a OK y START PRINT 25 00001 GO TO 20
137. cified in the command string or the current pending line must be at the EOF After executing the count EDIT returns to the current pending line Examples Figure 4 39 illustrates the use of the SZ command to list file size 300 This is line 300 of the file SZ 5992 This is line 300 of the file Go to end of file EOF 300 sz Count words from line 1 to line 300 5992 EOF sz Count words from line 1 to end of file 19328 Figure 4 39 SZ Check File Size Command Examples 4 74 EDIT 1000 Commands T Set Tabs Uses Command Syntax Remarks tc1 tc2 tc30 TA TF TP TU e Usein line mode to set tab columns e Use special tab commands TA TE TM TP and TU to set tab columns as they are commonly set for such programming languages as Assembler FORTRAN Macro Pascal and HP UX e Use TL version of command to set terminal tab stops to line up with line mode tabs e Use TS version of command to set terminal tab stops to line up with screen mode tabs e Use TU to set stops for the full screen width T tc1 tc2 tc30 Enter up to 30 tab column numbers to indicate the location of the tab stops The T command is used to specify the column numbers for up to 30 tab stops Once set these stops can be displayed and adjusted local to the terminal set with either the TL or TS command The pre set tab stops TA TE TM TP and TU can also be used for program development If n
138. contains five vertical bars with the repeat command Seliesml Command Separator Figure 4 57 _ Repeat Command Example Figure 4 58 illustrates a command that finds all BEGIN END blocks and appends them to the list file which must be opened before this command line is entered For this to function properly the work file cannot have nested BEGIN END blocks that start in column 1 The SE RT OFF command causes the Find command to remain at the EOF when there are no more lines that start with BEGIN This example starts by positioning the file to the first line that starts with BEGIN The repeated command lines mark the pending line with an a finds the next line that starts with END and marks it with a b It then appends the blocks marked with a and b to the list file The work file is then positioned to the next line that starts with BEGIN and the process is repeated until the pending line is after the last line in the file SS b begin ka end kb a b 1 begin 1 _ Figure 4 58 _ Repeat Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 99 Comment Uses Used to enter a comment line in an EDIT command file All characters after the up to the end of the command line are ignored by EDIT This includes ignoring a command separator character if it appears after the comment character Command lt text gt Syntax Remarks EDIT ignores the remaining text on the command line once it
139. creen mode and puts the entire file on the screen well at least as much as comfortably fits in the terminal s memory Then use the delete line key to delete the title lines and the blank line at the end of the file In addition delete all lines containing names of files are not to be compiled and printed Use the control and U command to exit the screen mode Next issue the EDIT command to turn Regular Expressions ON The shortest form of this command is sere The full SE RE ON command is not necessary because the default setting for the Regular Expressions option is OFE When the command is issued EDIT toggles the setting if the ON OFF parameter is omitted from the command The file now contains the desired filenames one per line The next step involves issuing the EDIT exchange command to converts the filenames into the required CI commands The following example illustrates the type of command that is needed ftn7x CNTLD_CMD 0 qc print CNTLD_CMD 1st At this point a Regular Expressions command must be issued to match all of the characters from the start of each line up to the first dot All the characters on the line are then replaced by the desired characters that is ftn7x etc and the filename is put in both input filename positions To do this enter the command 1 X f tn7x amp 1 0 qc print 1 1st This command starts off specifying a line range of 1 which is the first line in the file through
140. cters in the preceding example Characters to the right of the defined fields are left in place while shorter lines are not changed because they do not match the pattern Text or blanks can be inserted between the columns by inserting the desired text blanks in the substitute string between amp 3 amp 2 and amp 1 in the preceding example EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 23 Make All Lines a To make all lines in a file a minimum length 4 characters in the Minimum Length example following enter the command EWC4 1 U Q SEWC window columns to default Suppress listing of changes The replaces nothing w nothing add blanks if needed Unconditional exchange command Line range from line 1 to end of file Command separator Set window column option to column 4 Figure 5 24 Making All Lines a Minimum Length After the preceding example all lines are at least four characters long Any line shorter than four characters is padded with blanks out to column four 5 24 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Learning Exercises To test your understanding try developing one or more commands and match pattern to accomplish the following tasks answers are provided on the following page 1 Develop a search command that searches for part numbers within a file A sample of the numbers to be located is listed below Each part number consists of a number followed by an alpha character followed by three numbers followed by tw
141. cters used to indicate special processing In EDIT files are named using the standard RTE naming convention referred to in CI as a file descriptor or in FMGR as a file namr which consists of several user definable parameters The CI file descriptor formats supported include filename typ xtension dir type size user gt node OR dir subdir filename type ext type size user gt node OR filename security code cartridge type size The last format listed above is the format supported for the FMGR file namr For more information refer to the User s Manual for your RTE system New EDIT text files are created through a two step process 1 accessing EDIT and inserting text 2 exiting EDIT by using one of the save commands or by listing lines of text from an existing file to a new file EDIT 1000 Operations 3 5 3 6 EDIT 1000 Operations When the EDIT runstring is used without specifying a filename EDIT displays the following message CI gt edit EDIT Use for help FI lt filename gt specifies file to edit EOF When the EDIT runstring is entered with a filename that does not exist EDIT displays the following message CI gt edit smart EDIT Use for help No such file SMART An ER or the first WR will create it EOF Note that in each case the message displayed is followed by the EDIT prompt This indicates that if text is entered in either the line or screen mode it will be wr
142. curs at the end of the line Similar to the caret character the dollar sign does not match the end of the line but rather the end of the search window However the situation is somewhat more complicated for matches anchored to the end of the search window The end of the line may be to the left or the right of the end of the search window For such situations the dollar sign anchors the match to the smaller of the two If the text line ends at column 50 and the right limit of the search window is at column 150 the dollar sign anchors the match to the end of the line at column 50 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 9 Character Class Brackets xyz For example the following command i se we i 10 Search window column WC 1 10 xyzzy matches the boxed items in the following sample text note that the fourth line of the sample text has been modified for this example abcd defg qwert Xyzzy asdf hgijkl vbnm XYZY rtyu XyzzY ab Figure 5 6 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy with WC 1 10 The first and third lines have strings that match the pattern and end in the same column as the end of the search window The string on the fourth line is a match to the pattern because it occurs at the end of the line When the Regular Expressions option is set to ON a search or exchange pattern set can be used to match any single text character from that set These pattern sets are referred to as Characte
143. d Enter line mode command s When multiple commands are entered on the same line separate the commands with a vertical bar Press the carriage return After command execution EDIT returns to screen mode with cursor positioned at the current pending line Do not use the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor off of the line provided for line mode entry after use of CTRL C When the carriage return is used the line containing the command to be executed is deleted If the cursor is on another line when the carriage return is pressed a line of text is deleted and the com mand becomes part of your text Saves new screen edits and advances to next screen Double to ignore new edits Saves new screen edits and goes back to previous screen Double to ignore new edits CTRL P does not work on X 25 pad terminals Note CTRL R CTRL K CTRL O CTRL S CTRL T CTRL X CTRL U CTRL Q CTRL D Saves new screen edits and goes back to previous screen Use for X 25 pad terminals Marks line indicated by the current cursor location Following the carriage return places a colon in column 79 of the screen and requires entry of an alphabetic character Copies the line indicated by current cursor location Saves new edits and starts next screen at line indicated by the current cursor position Double to ignore new edits Should not be used if your terminal uses Xon Xoff handshake protocol Same as CTRL S Use for terminals with
144. d Replace command Then type MAKE LST at the CI gt prompt to obtain a printout of the listing EDIT s pattern matching and exchange capabilities can also be used to gather data from many different files into one summary table For example suppose you had written a simulator that produced text output files describing the results of each simulation Each simulation run uses different input data and creates a different results file You would like to gather several numbers from each of the results files and build them into one summary table file You would like to time stamp the table and format the table with headers The numbers you require are on different lines of the simulator results files Figure 5 25 lists the results files produced by different runs of the simulator The naming convention used to signify a results file is EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 29 5 30 the starting equal sign The next three letters describe the input data set and the last two letters describe parameters to the simulator directory JDJ AM AMDAT FFT34 FFT44 FFT57 FFT58 FFT66 FFTBB KAL55 KAL5A Figure 5 25 List of Input Files RU AM X 16 KALDE gt KALDE KAL54 Start time Mon Oct 26 1987 11 43 pm Stop time Mon Oct 26 1987 11 49 pm RMEM size cache size Address Lookups Instruction Expansions Syllables Extracted address lookups 1 per pipeline breaks 1 per taken jump execution 1l per expanded in
145. d in Chapter 3 of this Manual A detailed listing of the messages with descriptions and suggested action is included in Appendix A of this Manual EDIT 1000 Basics 1 15 Getting Started Tutorial Introduction This chapter provides a tutorial for the beginning EDIT 1000 user The tutorial is divided into three parts that can be read separately or all in one sitting as your schedule permits e Part 1 Screen Mode Editing e Part2 Line Mode Commands e Part3 Efficient Editing Figure 2 1 illustrates the topics covered under each part of the tutorial This chapter also includes a set of quick reference task charts that provide a collection of commands used to accomplish specific tasks such as Displaying Information and Moving Around the Editing Screen The information in this chapter will enable you to e Run the EDIT 1000 program EDIT command and enter the name of an existing file to be edited FI File Input command e Use the Abort A Exit and Replace ER and Exit and Create EC commands to exit the EDIT program e Create a sample file using the screen mode and selected line mode commands e Use the Screen S command to enter EDIT 1000 s screen mode and use the control key commands to move between screens display a larger screen and exit the screen mode e Use the local terminal keys to insert and delete text e Use the CTRL C C key combination to temporarily exit the screen mode to execute
146. d is used EDIT 1000 Operations 3 29 Table 3 4 Option Setting Examples Escape character to Indefinite character to Prompt character to Regular expressions option to ON Line length to 80 After this change lines longer than 80 characters will be truncated as they are edited or when the BK command is used Case folding to off Search window to columns 7 through 21 Screen size default to 41 lines The number of screen lines is still limited by the SL option Maximum screen mode size to 30 lines Be aware of maximum size so that you don t lose the screen overflow protection Check terminal setting with SH SL command Vertical window to 31 lines Anchor character to Tab character to Command separator to Suppress verification prompt Screen display functions To leave pending line at lower limit after unsuccessful or multiple finds 3 30 EDIT 1000 Operations on 1 256 10 10 2 Number is terminal dependent 21 N TAB key CTRL on on Returns to original pending line seec se ic se pc se re on se le 80 se cf off se we 7 21 se sd 20 20 1 se sl 30 se vw 20 10 se ac se tc se cs se as off se df off se rt off Line Mode Editing Line Character Edits Line Character Modes CTRL C CTRL R CTRL S When editing in the command line mode EDIT displays a single line of text at a time and the EDIT prompt character i
147. d use the Help command to request help on the SH Show command You use U instead of C when displaying information because C immediately returns you to the screen mode allowing you about two seconds to read the information displayed Your entries and the system response should look similar to Figure 2 11 following SH option or option Show an option or default value SH displays the current settings of all options shows the current file and Edit clone names The options can be set with the SE command Figure 2 11 Example of the Online Reference Display for the SH Command Finding Out Where You Are N Getting Where You Want to Be n To try the SH Show command enter the command to show the default for the EDIT prompt character Your entries and the system response should look similar to the following s 96 Prompt character PC To display all EDIT options use the command SH or SH ALL Try this command now For more information on the Help and Show commands refer to the command descriptions in Chapter 4 EDIT 1000 Commands Many EDIT commands are executed at the current pending line For this reason you may need to know the line number of the current pending line The N Line Number command is used while in line mode to display the line number of the current pending line If using the screen mode to enter text exit the screen mode using U followed by a carriage return If you use C
148. ddresses are used to define a line or an edge a horizontal line or edge is defined first followed by a vertical line or edge to reach the second point Note that lines and edges must be horizontal or vertical Whenever there is an inverse video point displayed you are in CTRL D mode While in CTRL D mode characters are not echoed as they are entered Rather they are interpreted as CTRL D mode commands see the following list when carriage return is pressed If the entered characters do not form a valid CTRL D command after pressing carriage return the terminal bell will sound and the cursor is placed at the last point in the list Note that systems without the new serial drivers will echo characters due to an incompatibility in the MUX driver To enter a command on these systems type CTRL C followed by a carriage EDIT 1000 Operations 3 39 3 40 EDIT 1000 Operations return EDIT will open a line on the screen and display the following prompt CTRL D mode gt At this point you should enter a CTRL D mode command The prompt and the command will be executed and then erased after you press carriage return To erase the last point in the CTRL D list position the cursor to the display point and enter another CTRL D This will erase the inverse video mark and the point for the list To remove all points enter the CTRL D command Q CTRL D mode commands are defined below They are all single character commands sometimes
149. de 3 31 screen mode 1 10 1 11 1 12 3 36 key combinations 4 61 keys 2 36 4 61 canceling 3 37 double execution 3 37 line mode 3 31 screen mode 2 15 2 20 3 36 single execution 3 37 copy command 2 28 copying screen memory 4 68 screen mode text 4 6 text 2 28 2 30 4 12 create file failure 3 7 creating a file 2 7 2 9 3 5 3 6 4 15 4 86 Index 2 regular expressions patterns 5 20 text 2 12 CS option 3 25 CTRL 2 15 CTRL A 3 37 4 62 CTRL B 3 32 CTRL C 2 20 3 31 3 38 4 62 CTRL D 2 37 CTRL E 2 15 2 21 3 35 3 38 4 62 CTRL I 3 31 CTRL J 3 38 4 62 CTRL K 2 28 3 38 4 63 CTRL O 3 38 4 63 CTRL P 3 35 3 38 4 62 4 63 CTRL Q 2 17 3 38 4 63 CTRL R 2 37 3 31 CTRL S 2 16 3 5 3 38 CTRLT 2 15 3 32 3 38 CTRL U 2 17 2 CTRL X 2 16 3 CTRL Z 3 37 4 CTRL D 4 63 current prompt B 1 cursor location 2 22 2 24 3 36 4 63 4 63 21 3 38 3 39 4 63 2 3 35 3 38 4 63 2 3 6 D D command 4 13 dangerous command confirmation 1 13 1 15 2 8 2 41 3 5 3 8 3 47 4 2 4 3 4 22 4 35 4 79 dating files 3 8 default B 2 defaulting a parameter 3 36 Delete D command 4 13 delete control character 3 26 deleting a file 3 11 characters 2 12 lines 2 12 4 13 4 35 tabs 4 78 text 2 29 2 42 3 33 trailing blanks 4 8 delimiter 2 31 B 2 determining line number 2 21 location 2 21 DF option 3 26 disk space 4 16 Display Functions DF option 3
150. descriptor of file to be merged into current work file Refer to previous section in Chapter 3 on filename descriptors Optional If only part of the file is to be merged specify the first line of text to be copied into the work file The file can be larger than the 32 500 line file limit If omitted the default is the first line of the file named Optional Indicates the number of lines to be copied from the file named into the current work file This is NOT a line number If omitted default is the end of the file named Optional Use instead of start line number of lines to indicate beginning and ending line numbers for the merge Start and stop line must be separated by a colon The numbers entered may be larger than 32 500 but the total number of lines merged must be less than 32 500 The Undo UN command reverses the M command If the M command fails to open the file EDIT remains at the pending line Once the file has been merged the pending line is the last line read The merge file is opened non exclusively that is another user can access the file while EDIT is reading it for the merge operation EDIT cannot merge the file it currently has exclusively opened as the source file If you need to merge the source file use the FCS file close source command to close it Then the merge will be successful EDIT 1000 Commands 4 49 A space or comma is required between the M and the filename if the filename begins w
151. ding line However the number of lines displayed is determined by the maximum number of lines option described following if it is entered Optional maximum number of lines to be listed Limits any line range specified If both the second line specification and maximum are omitted only 20 lines are listed To default the maximum number to the range specified enter two commas after the L command For example 1 50 L LISTFILE This option must be specified or defaulted with two commas if a list file is to be used Optional append character indicating that the list file named is to be appended to lines added to the end of the file and not overwritten Use the plus option without a filename to append to the open list file Optional list file Opens or creates a list file to store the lines specified Use either an existing filename descriptor a new filename descriptor to create a file or a device number for example to list to a printer Refer to sections in Chapters 1 and 3 on filename specification If this option is to be used the maximum option see above must be specified by either indicating a maximum number of lines or by ce 99 using to default to the line range specified Remarks Examples Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK dangerous command confirmation prompt displayed when a file descriptor is entered to list lines to another file If an existing fil
152. ds in a file of all lowercase characters and suppress asking suppress the OK prompt enter Letters of Words the following command ECFON 1 G a z a z gt 1 amp 2 Suppress OK Terminator Recall item 2 Recall amp capitalize item 1 End of item 2 for zero or more occurrences to catch 1l letter words Item 2 is 1 alpha character End of item 1 Item 1 is one alpha character Exchange command Line range from line 1 to end of file Set case folding option to ON so that EDIT won t distinguish between upper and lowercase Command separator Set regular expressions option to ON Figure 5 20 Capitalizing First Letter of All Words in a File EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 21 Add Text to To add text to the end of lines in the file that have varying lengths Variable Length including blank lines enter the command Lines EREON 1 G text Q Lrstminator Suppress listing of change Enter desired text To exchange at the end of the line Exchange command Line range from line 1 to end of file Command separator Set regular expressions option to ON Figure 5 21 Adding Text to the End of Lines with Varying Lengths To add text to the end of all lines except the blank lines enter the command SEREON 1 G amp text Q Insert at a Specific To insert a character at a specific column column 40 throughout Column the fi
153. e FADD Sx A Illegal line range user entered instead of Figure 3 5 provides examples of informational messages Type SH to show all options and their current set No such file XYZWW Figure 3 5 Examples of EDIT Informational Messages When it is displayed the RTE break message requires user input This message is displayed as a result of user entry when the system is not ready for input In other words you may have inadvertently interrupted the EDIT session or you may have purposefully interrupted the session to cancel an EDIT command or listing see following section on Break Mode The RTE A and RTE 6 VM break messages are displayed below CM gt RTE A S lt LUnumber gt COMMAND _ RTE 6 VM Press the carriage return to ignore the message and EDIT will continue the current operation Enter BR to terminate the current EDIT operation EDIT stops the current operation prints the message Operator Break and you can proceed to enter EDIT commands EDIT 1000 Operations 3 45 Recovering from Errors User Errors Break Mode System Errors 3 46 EDIT 1000 Operations The most common errors occurring during an EDIT session are user input errors Occasionally however the RTE system may crash or the EDIT program may abort itself due to an internal error in the middle of an editing session Typing errors made when entering a command at the EDIT prompt can be erased by using the terminal backspac
154. e Uses Command Default Command Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Remarks Examples 4 16 EDIT 1000 Commands Use to exit EDIT session and replace a file with the current work file ER lt current source file gt ER lt filedescriptor gt Enter the filename descriptor of the file to be replaced Refer to section in Chapter 3 on filename specification Using the ER command overwrites a file until it reaches the END OF FILE or disk space becomes full If EDIT overwrites an original file with a newly edited file that is larger than the original then a file extent may be created Should a file extend beyond the storage capacity of the disk EDIT displays the following error message RAN OUT OF DISK SPACE lt filename gt This message signals that you have corrupted the original file Do not exit EDIT or your work file will be purged and the original lost To recover 1 Use the FCS command to close the source file 2 Use the EDIT RU command to run CI or FMGR 3 Free up disk space by deleting or moving data so that you can replace a file 4 Exit from CI or FMGR 5 Use ER to re write the file Figure 4 11 illustrates the use of the ER command to replace a source file to replace another file leaving the original source file LEMON unchanged an unsuccessful attempt to replace a non existent file an unsuccessful attempt to replace a file that has a security code note that security codes apply to FMGR
155. e or a block of lines from the text file Line specifications are optional If no line specifications are included in the command string the L command defaults to display 20 lines of text starting with the current pending line The last line displayed becomes the new pending line Suppose you are editing and your current location is at the end of the file at about line 100 Before you exit the editing session you would like to view the first 20 lines of text to see if you entered a comment to describe the file To do this you would use U to escape the screen mode you are displaying information and will need more time to view the data than a C would provide and then enter the command 120 5 EDIT would display the first 20 lines of text followed by the prompt To return to the end of the file you would enter a at the prompt If you decided to enter a comment you would enter an S Screen to enter screen mode There are many ways to use the L command For example you can enter L 14 to list the next 14 lines of the file including the pending line enter 18 L to list 20 lines beginning with line 18 enter 10 14 L 4 to list lines 10 through 14 and enter LN to list 20 lines with the line numbers It is also possible to direct the output from the L command to a file or device for example a printer For details refer to the task charts in this chapter The W List Window command displays a vertical lines above and below
156. e B command except that the start search default is the line after the pending line whereas the start search default for the B command is line 1 Examples Figure 4 12 illustrates the use of the F command to find all occurrences of angle bracket pairs to find the first occurrence of the string begin and to find the string Chapter with the Case Folding option off to differentiate between upper and lowercase letters 1 lt gt a 00005 This illustrates using the lt F gt command to find all angle bracket pairs 00006 The lt B gt and lt F gt commands are similar EOF 2 matches CF 1 begin This illustrates using the F command to find the first occurrence of Begin SSMERMOTE Case folding 1 Chapter n This illustrates how to find the word Chapter anywhere on a line Figure 4 12 F Find a Pattern Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 19 FCL File Close List Uses e Use to close the list file opened or created with the L or K command Use of this command allows access to a list file without having to leave the editing session e Use to close a list file listed to a printer This releases unlocks the printer for use by other users Command FCL Syntax Remarks If the list file is already closed no message is displayed When a list file is closed EDIT performs a page ejection for printers writes an EOF End Of File mark for tape drives and displays two blank lines for terminals If list file
157. e Q Quiet option to suppress listing of matched lines e Use with RE Regular Expressions set to ON to use the metacharacters for pattern matching Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on Regular Expressions X lt last exchange and substitute gt linespec 1 linespec 2 X pattern substitute N Q R S Optional A line range may be specified for this command using either absolute line numbers separated by a space or comma or line specification characters If no range is specified the exchange affects only the pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Delimiter for pattern and substitute Use matching punctuation marks with the exception of commas and spaces All three delimiters must be used when any option or OK prompt suppression is used If no options are used the last delimiter may be omitted The default pattern and substitute for exchange commands may be used by omitting the pattern delimiters and substitute To view the current pattern and substitute defaults use the SH Show command for any of the exchange commands G U X and Y To default the pattern and substitute but specify an option enter X lt option gt Pattern to be located See section in Chapter 3 on pattern specifications If Regular Expressions is set to ON the metacharacters can be used for unique pattern matches refer to Chapter 5 for more on Re
158. e Wee CE OR ee id YY ie ENO wee Byes 4 31 PLPC reader Eine Pending 45 guia 0 io A A a ack sews 4 32 Finsen Line 4 sac 25 oy ain eae Cate E bn Deeds akties Car eter Clee een ee AEA oe 4 33 POI ines pour cid ita eee ee cee 4 34 I RIE LNGS so ae ase tae oes Sa ra Sam ao taa a 4 35 Kx Mark O 4 38 L List esata nitive sewers ES AA EEE ieee wie EA 4 40 EE Line A ta dag et O te te oh cub er es ree eee ese atts 4 43 LI List Lines in File 2 243 204 sade aut ii id AAA 4 44 EN List Lines with Line Numbers ici sede See wah ida Say oceans 4 45 LU List Lines Unnumbered 3 02 5 octaicausdswdae eb oles bd 4 47 M Merge wee oe les OPP eee IA IA AA P25 it Benes 2x 4 49 MO Moye p meso it Cane AA AA ea Cowen Baad eee eee 4 51 IN Display Line Number sis dorset ie amen A areas eee es 4 53 i Specific Line Number estare suet ona eS ile eae os 4 54 O Duplicate Pending Line amp Edit cr Gages yee eyes eee cease Yaeger 4 55 P Pending Lane Fait ic conten ys aS ra si 4 56 Q Single Line Screen Mode Edit sas co ato rr ad 4 57 R Replace Pending Line with Text tada Pete henye diets ia 4 59 RW RUM Propran seere ert ieee o s EAEAP AETA T a n AAE ATE ea aci 4 60 S Screen Mode Edit cs ecstasy ie or E ear E ae a a 4 61 SC Screen Copy is le nd hg 4 68 SE S t Option s peisea a e aia 4 69 SH SHOW OPONE AA ey ae eS AE 4 72 SZ Check Pile Size AS aaa pee Soe eee eke AA 4 74 T Set Tabs Lira sire eee ER apes AAA AE GRO 4 75 IN A car as
159. e a new filename when you start the EDIT session either in the EDIT runstring or after the program is initiated via the FI command and then exit EDIT with the ER Exit and Replace or WR Write and Replace command The second way to edit a new file is to run EDIT without specifying a filename type in text and create the file by terminating EDIT with either the EC Exit and Create or WC Write and Create command plus a filename Getting Started Tutorial 2 9 it e Editing in Screen Mode S The recommended method of editing a new file is to specifying the filename when you start EDIT This enables you to exit EDIT entering only the ER command without a filename The commands EC WC ER and WR are described in this tutorial Enter the EDIT command at the RTE user interface prompt Then enter the command FI TESTFILE at the EDIT prompt You should receive the message No such file TESTFILE An ER or the first WR will create it EOF followed by the EDIT prompt You are now ready to access the screen mode and enter a file As described in Chapter 1 EDIT 1000 Basics EDIT has two editing modes line mode and screen mode Line mode is used to enter line commands such as the screen mode command and the commands to search for and exchange text copy and move text and merge in text from another file You know you are in line mode when you see the EDIT prompt default Unless you specify the screen mode i
160. e abort command is used from an existing file to which changes were made CI gt Edane e EDIT Use for help Opened file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 28 lines read This is line one of the file FIRST changes made a OK EDIT aborted by user Closed file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 end of edit Gi The abort A command is only one of three commands used to exit the EDIT 1000 program The EC Exit and Create and ER Exit and Replace commands enable you to exit edit and save the changes made to the new or existing file The EC and ER commands are described at the end of this portion of the tutorial A fourth command AS Abort and Save Work File is not normally used and is described in Chapter 4 of this manual If the EDIT runstring is entered without designating a specific file to be edited you have the option to use the FI File Input command to edit an existing file or a new file The FI command is entered at the line mode prompt default and is followed by a carriage return If you choose to edit an existing file use the FI command followed by the filename For example CI gt edit EDIT Use for help FI lt file name gt specifies file to edit EOF Es Opened file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 28 lines read This is line one of the file FIRST The FI command accesses the desired file and positions you on the first line of the file ready for editing There are two ways to edit a new file You can designat
161. e command For example if the cursor is positioned on line five of the sample text and the T combination is used the screen displayed begins with line five as illustrated in Figure 2 8 Getting Started Tutorial 2 15 DoeKAAAK Tine 5 ee Ctrl U reads ctrl U ctrl U aborts lt lt inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of the terminal and can also move the window forward or backward any number of lines within the file The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which gt gt line 25 TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 38 Figure 2 8 TESTFILE Screen Display After Use of S The S key combination can be used instead of the T on terminals that do not use Xon Xoff handshake protocol Because S can cause problems with Xon Xoff hands
162. e current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Enter any letter a through z upper or lower case EDIT ignores case for marked lines Each letter may be used only once Ifa duplicate letter is used the original mark with that letter is cleared Spaces are not allowed between the entry of the K and the alpha letter or EDIT interprets the entry as a Kill K command In screen mode lines can also be marked using the control keys To do this move the cursor to the line to be marked Press the CTRL and K keys then press the carriage return When the carriage return is pressed EDIT displays a colon at the end of the line Enter the desired letter for the mark When in screen mode the use of a double CTRL command to exit the screen without reading instructs EDIT to disregard all marks set since the last read Figure 4 26 illustrates the use of the Kx command to mark a line from line mode to move to an offset above a marked line to delete a block of text specified by markers and to find a marked line The S Screen Mode command is used to show how a marked line is displayed in screen mode META a00015This line has been marked with an a ARO Moves to ten lines above mark m Judy Judy Judy s gt gt exKAAK Line 22 x xxx CTRL U reads CTRL U CTRL U aborts lt lt Tom was always cautious near the end of a pro
163. e key prior to entering the command with the carriage return Almost all of the EDIT commands can also be reversed after entry by using the Undo UN command Simply enter UN at the EDIT prompt to reverse the last work file change EDIT is able to undo the last work file change because it maintains an undo list of the last changes made as a result of an EDIT command To view this list prior to using the UN command enter the SH UN Show Undo List command at the EDIT prompt If changes are made to a file that cannot be reversed using the UN command you should abort A EDIT to avoid saving the changes or start re editing the original text file using the FI command The colon defaults to the most recently used filename The RTE break commands can be used at any time to terminate the execution of an EDIT command or command listing To interrupt the command press any key The system displays one of the following messages S lt LUnumber gt COMMAND _ RTE 6 VM CM gt _ RTE A Enter BR EDIT stops the current operation prints the message Operator Break and you can proceed to enter EDIT commands If EDIT was executing an exchange during the break the exchange is partially completed when EDIT resumes The UN command can be used to undo the partial change When the EDIT program is abnormally terminated due to a system crash or an internal EDIT program error the work file is left in the work area of the storage diskor cartridge ED
164. e list The area defined by the closed polygon through the remaining points is then copied so that the first marked point is on top of the locator point The path see P command through the points is erased This is the same as the P E command Take the point list as pairs of points and draw lines between the pairs Same as copy but erase the original area before copying Start at the first point in the list and draw a line through each consecutive point until the end of the list has been reached As always if two points are not aligned horizontally or vertically draw the horizontal line first followed by a vertical line CTRL D mode Erase all marks and return to normal screen mode Restore the marks of the previous CTRL D mode command and reenter CTRL D mode If the previous command was copy or move the locator points are not restored Undo the last CTRL D mode command Normally the screen will be read before the CTRL D mode command is executed If there has not been any screen mode changes to the area to be affected by the CTRL D mode command that is going to be executed the screen read time can be saved by entering an N with the command EDIT 1000 Commands 4 65 Caution Remarks 4 66 EDIT 1000 Commands Line Style Options B Bold P Paired E Erase Example Boxes Normal Box Bold Box If the beginning or ending screen bracket lines are deleted EDIT displays the following mess
165. e numbers to keep 4 5 track of the lines 5 6 6 A LAT BB A AS B EE D B EE RTE QE BE EEE AA RS Fill instruction SE FL 55050 Sets up the columns a b FL Fills the box Example of a box after using Fill 1 This is text of a box A test to see if the 1 2 fi11 code will actually work These lines 2 3 need to be filled We also have numbers to 3 4 keep track of the lines 4 5 5 6 6 We TKE PoP ETR LEE SEL DEED POET ETAL US A UR AN A E E If more lines are needed in a paragraph they are created by using the break line prior to the lt start gt column and after the lt end gt column If lines are left over after the fill they are purged only if they are totally blank 3 44 EDIT 1000 Operations Error and Information Messages sh zebra Not an option ting ec lemon File already exists L M Xy ZWW Two types of error or information messages are displayed during operation of the EDIT 1000 program user input errors and RTE file system errors All EDIT 1000 error messages and the most common RTE file system errors are described in detail in Appendix A Error and Information Messages EDIT reprints user input errors followed on the next line by a question mark in column one EDIT places a caret under the erroneous field Error and informational messages are displayed starting in column one to differentiate them from listings of the file text For exampl
166. e other The sixth line does not match because there are n s and spaces between three possible occurrences of a pattern match If the sixth line had read abb abn abn it would have matched The metacharacter is the indefinite or wildcard character used in Regular Expression patterns It is used to match zero or more occurrences of any character When an is first encountered in a pattern EDIT matches everything up to the end of the line Then the rest of the pattern is compared to the remainder of the line to ensure that the line contains a complete match to the pattern Thus the rest of the pattern requires EDIT to shorten the text matched by the metacharacter This elimination of characters matched by the is repeated until the pattern matches or until there are no characters matched by the EDIT backtracks over the entire line for each portion of the pattern following the This is referred to as longest possible matching and it is described in more detail at the beginning of the Regular Expressions section If more than one is used in a pattern the matching process takes longer to complete since a full set of backtracking is done for each successive every time a single character backtracking is done for the first For example the command F abc 0 a matches the boxed items in the following text djk1k3k1k3k1k3k1 d ajkijxr ja al Figure 5 14 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F abc
167. e the Merge M command to cre ate several smaller files Getting Started Tutorial 2 17 Part 2 Line Mode Commands Contents and This portion of the tutorial provides instructions on using Sample File EDIT 1000 line mode commands The flow chart in Figure 2 9 illustrates the contents of Part 2 of the tutorial The sample file illustrated in Figure 2 10 has been used for the examples in this section ENTERING LINE COMMANDS FROM SCREEN MODE C DISPLAYING INFORMATION H SH FINDING OUT WHERE YOU ARE N GETTING WHERE YOU WANT TO BE n DISPLAYING A PORTION OF THE FILE L W MARKING A LINE SAVING FILE WITHOUT EXITING EDIT WR WC Figure 2 9 Tutorial Map Part 2 Line Commands From Screen Mode 2 18 Getting Started Tutorial If you would like to try the exercises described in this tutorial the sample file used is the same as the sample text file entered in Part 1 of the tutorial If you did not enter the sample text file in Part 1 of the tutorial use the following command from the RTE CI user interface to enter EDIT 13 CI gt edit Next enter the S Screen command at the EDIT prompt to access the screen mode With the cursor positioned on the bottom screen bracket line use the INS LINE key on your terminal to insert enough blank lines to type in the sample text illustrated in Figure 2 10 Use the INS CHAR DEL CHAR INS LINE and DEL LINE keys as necessary until the text
168. e will be wrapped to the next line on the screen display After the Q command edit is complete position the cursor on the first line of the wrapped text before pressing the carriage return If the cursor is not positioned on the first line of the wrapped text the lines above the cursor are lost Error and Information Messages A 9 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Read terminated before end of file found Informational error message displayed when EDIT did not completely read in the file Occurs if user enters the BR Break command if a corrupted file is accessed or if EDIT runs out of work space when reading in the file Message is preceded by a message indicating the reason for termination of the read This message is displayed if the file exceeds the file size limit of 32 500 lines Correct the error which resulted in termination of the read If message was received in response to an FI File Input command use of the ER Exit and Replace command truncates any data that was not read in prior to the read termination Use the A Abort command to avoid truncating data To save the data use the Merge M command to create several smaller files that can be edited and then re merged using the CI Command Interpreter merge program Refer also to the FMP File Management Package error message RAN OUT OF DISK SPACE RESTORE S
169. e work file abort using the AS Abort and Save Work File command This may allow time to consult with the System Manager to determine what can be done to save the file However unless the S runstring option is used EDIT continues to enter the recovery mode each time it is run until the work file is purged or recovered with EC or ER The only way to exit EDIT and save the work file without purging it is to use the AS Abort and Save Work File command If the AS command is used EDIT displays the dangerous command confirmation prompt OK The next time an EDIT session is initiated EDIT runs a recovery operation to reconstruct the work file as in Figure 3 6 5 w n K By DIT aborted by user losed file SMART HERMAN 4 1 2 nd of edit I gt edit ile already exists EDIT 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 26 128 ork file EDIT 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 512 128 DIT Use for help ntering recover mode 6 lines recovered O C e C F W Figure 3 6 Example of Use of the Abort and Save AS Command To recover a work file resulting from an aborted EDIT session on another terminal enter the runstring CI gt edit r lt work file descriptor gt A brief explanation of the recovery mode can be obtained by entering the RM Help on Recovery Mode command In addition the recovery mode can be circumvented by using the runstring option that places the system scratch file on another disk or directory
170. each line and do not type over the beginning or ending screen brack ets EDIT 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers develop software quickly and accurately with minimal effort EDIT 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of the terminal and can also move the window forward or backward any number of lines within the file The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which are often faster and more convenient to use than the line edit commands of the editor Figure 2 5 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the Tutorial Part 1 Getting Started Tutorial 2 13 Because the sample text is more than 21 lin
171. eads the current screen of text saving all new edits For example a single execution of the command to move forward to the next screen of text F followed by a carriage return saves the screen as it appears just prior to execution of the command A double execution of the control command for example F F followed by a carriage return executes the command and ignores edits made to the screen When you do not want the screen read use the double control command to reduce the time required to move around in the text file This tutorial describes the use of the following control key combination commands F P X S T Q and U Several additional control key commands are available For more information refer to the description of the Screen S command in Chapter 4 EDIT allows you to save or ignore text entered in the work file during the editing process This is done when you advance a screen or go back to a previous screen To move forward one screen use the F for forward key combination This displays the next 21 lines including a two line overlap and saves the changes made to the original screen To move back one screen use the P for previous key combination This displays the 21 lines of text including a two line overlap preceding the current screen and saves the changes made to the current screen The T key combination displays 21 lines of text from the line that the cursor is positioned on at the time of th
172. ecall lt n 5 3 5 18 match one or more 5 3 5 13 match pattern n times lt n gt 5 3 5 14 match zero or more 5 3 5 12 negated character class xyz 5 3 5 11 single character wildcard 5 3 5 7 tagged string xyz 5 3 5 17 tagged string recall amp n 5 3 5 17 uppercase tagged string recall gt n 5 3 5 18 mnemonic 3 13 MO command 2 23 2 29 4 51 4 52 modifying a file See editing Move MO command 2 29 moving around the screen 2 36 columns of data 5 23 screen mode text 4 9 text 2 29 4 51 through the file 2 21 N N command 2 2 2 21 2 28 2 39 4 53 n command 2 21 4 54 namr B 2 No Window N option 3 24 non alphanumeric commands 4 92 null control character 3 26 number of lines in file 4 44 O O command 3 31 4 55 OK prompt 1 13 See also dangerous command confirmation online reference 1 4 1 6 2 20 4 28 4 94 See also Help command options B 2 P P command 3 31 4 56 parsing 3 21 5 20 pattern definition B 2 delimiter 2 31 3 19 3 22 exchange 2 34 3 19 4 26 4 88 5 17 exchange substitute 2 34 match 3 18 matching anchoring to beginning of line 5 7 anchoring to end of line 5 9 literal 2 33 3 18 5 2 5 4 longest possible sequence 5 5 regular expressions 5 2 shortest possible sequence 5 5 specifying a string 5 16 parsing 5 20 search 4 90 All A option 2 32 3 19 backward 3 15 definition 2 31 3 18 forward 3 15 shortcuts 3
173. ection on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications n Starting column number for the time and date information Default is column one Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the TI command The time and date information is 30 characters long Examples Figure 4 41 illustrates the use of the TI command to add the time and date at column 20 on line 1171 O Time Stamp Example 1 15 PM MON 26 JAN 1987 Figure 4 41 TI Time Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 77 TK Tab Kill Uses Use to expand tab characters into the appropriate number of spaces Command 1 TK Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 TK Syntax linespec 1 linespec2 Optional line specification Specifies range of lines for tab kill operation Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks This command deletes the tab characters in the file and adds spaces to shift the next character to the next tab column of EDIT s current tab settings The Undo UN command reverses the TK command Tab characters are not normally processed by HP 1000 software Files imported from other systems may contain the characters and this command can be used to replace them with the appropriate number of spaces Examples Figure 4 42 illustrates the use of the TK command to pad blanks to place HP UX tabs set by the command TU in the appropriate column
174. efault buffer for exchange commands also has a substitute default string When a find command B F D or is entered the pattern default is used if the pattern was not specified for example F or E A or if the pattern specified is null for example F When an exchange command G U X or Y is entered the default match pattern and its associated substitute string is used if this parameter is omitted for example X or X Q If an exchange command is entered with a null zero length match pattern the default Find pattern is used as the match pattern for example X XZZ The match pattern used either defaulted or entered and the new substitute specified then become the Exchange match pattern and substitute default Table 3 2 provides a summary of the pattern defaults with examples The Y command is an exchange command that sets both the default Exchange pattern parameter match pattern and substitute and the default Find pattern The default match patterns can be copied between the Find and Exchange buffers To use the default Find pattern when executing an exchange specify a null match pattern and the appropriate substitute To copy the default Exchange pattern into the Find buffer use the Y command When an empty pattern is specified with a U command it is taken as a zero length delete field specification not a default Find pattern specification For example use of the command U x inserts an x at the
175. en Mode Editing Contents and This portion of the tutorial provides instructions on using Sample File EDIT 1000 s screen mode to edit text The flow chart in Figure 2 2 illustrates the contents of Part 1 of the tutorial 5 Throughout this tutorial a pointing hand symbol and italics are g used to highlight directions on how to create a sample file and use EDIT commands to manipulate it EDITING IN SCREEN MODE INSERTING amp DELETING TEXT MOVING AROUND IN SCREEN MODE MOVING BETWEEN SCREENS S T F R X EXITING amp SAVING Q U EC ER Figure 2 2 Tutorial Map Part 1 Screen Mode Editing 2 4 Getting Started Tutorial Quick Start Exercise This two page quick start exercise provides a brief introduction to working with EDIT 1000 and should give you a feel for using the EDIT program to create a text file Table 2 1 illustrates the tasks involved in creating a text file Specific instructions are listed to the right of each task The tutorial which follows this exercise will provide more detail on text entry and manipulation using the EDIT 1000 program To create a file enter the EDIT runstring from the RTE user interface prompt in this example CI gt Once in the EDIT line mode enter the S Screen Mode command to start screen mode You know you are in screen mode when you see the top and bottom screen brackets illustrated in Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Example of Screen
176. ename is specified for the list file option EDIT displays the OK prompt If YES is entered in response to the prompt EDIT overwrites the existing file with the lines specified in the L command To append the lines to the end of the existing file use the plus option described above To append more lines to the list file currently open enter the option without a list file descriptor For FMGR files specify the full file descriptor to ensure that the file is placed on the intended cartridge If a list file is written to the new pending line is the line below the last line listed If the L command is used without writing to a list file the new pending line is the last line listed Once a list file has been opened or created it can be closed using the FCL command If the list file is connected to a device such as the printer be sure to close it as soon as the list operation has completed This unlocks the device for use by other users on the system If the FCL command is not used EDIT automatically closes the list file when user exits the program To view or access the list file without leaving the editor be sure to use FCL to close the list file If line numbers are on displayed they are placed in the list file Therefore use of the List Lines Unnumbered LU command is recommended when listing to a file The L and K commands share the list file Figure 4 27 illustrates the use of the L command to list 20 lines from
177. encounters the comment command No further changes are made to the work file The command provides a method of commenting an EDIT transfer file Examples Following is an example of a portion of an EDIT transfer file The first line is a comment by itself the second line contains both a command and a comment This is a comment xyzzy This is also a comment Figure 4 59 Comment Command Example 4 100 EDIT 1000 Commands EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Introduction The information in this chapter will enable you to Define the terms Regular Expressions Metacharacters Literal Matching Anchoring Character Class Negated Character Class Alphanumeric Transition or Word Delimiting Switch or Exchange and Tag Field Distinguish between Regular Expressions ON mode and Regular Expressions OFF mode including the metacharacters valid for each mode and longest versus shortest possible matching Successfully use Regular Expressions to exchange columns of data to delete and add text to a group of similar lines in a file to align text to delete all blank lines in a file to capitalize only the first characters of each word in a file to insert a character in a specific column to change uppercase to lowercase to add text to the end of variable length lines to make all lines a minimum length and to find similar numbers Use Regular Expressions in conjunction with the RTE CI user interface to build file ma
178. entered the line range is listed Figure 4 33 illustrates the use of the LN List Numbered command to list the file before the n command is used several times to list specific lines line 1 LN5 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Last line Line 5 4 Line 4 I line Line des Ds Go to line 2 then list to line 4 Figure 4 33 n Specific Line Number Command Example 4 54 EDIT 1000 Commands O Duplicate Pending Line amp Edit Uses Command Default Command Syntax Remarks Examples linespec 1 line character edits CTRL B CTRL C CTRL R CTRL S CTRL P CTRL T CTRL X CTRL lt text gt Use in line mode to copy the pending line and allow character editing of the duplicated line The duplicated line is then the new pending line O linespec 1 O line character edits Optional line specification Use to go to and duplicate a line other than the current pending line If omitted the command edits and copies the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications This command enables use of the line character edits including text entry and use of control CTRL keys The line character edit options are briefly described following For more information refer to the Line Mode Character Editing section in Chapter 3 If no edits are entered
179. es A 13 RTE System and FMP Messages There are several FMP File Management Package messages issued by the RTE user interface that may be encountered when accessing EDIT The most common FMP messages are listed and described below For a more complete list refer to the RTE User s Manual Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action BAD RECORD LENGTH Error message displayed when EDIT is reading in a file and detects that the record structure of the file is corrupted This is usually the result of an abnormal program termination or a system error Examine file to determine what information has been lost An ER Exit and Replace command updates the file to have consistent record structure saving only the uncorrupted data currently in EDIT s work file DIRECTORY IS FULL Error message indicating that there is insufficient space in the current directory to add another file Delete unnecessary files use another directory or see your System Manager DIRECTORY READ PROTECTED Error message displayed when user attempts to use an FI File Input EDIT TR Transfer or M Merge command to access a directory that is read protected Check typing to ensure that the correct directory was specified log on as the owner of the file or see the System Manager to investigate possible access to the file DIRECTORY WRITE PROTECTED Error
180. es long EDIT displays it in two screens The first and second screens of the sample text are displayed in Figure 2 6 and Figure 2 7 22 ERRE ANO Lie EEA ERASE Curl Uy reads Cte U ectrl Uvaborts eee ext cK EDIT 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers develop software quickly and accurately with minimal effort EDIT 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of gt gt lin 21 TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 38 Figure 2 6 TESTFILE Screen Display First Screen A EXERRER Vine 20 AXRAAAEE CELI U reads ctrl U ctrl Ui aborts 444 lt lt cursor within this window indicates the character at wh
181. eturn 5 Exit the screen mode then exit EDIT and Exit the screen mode using the Control U save your new file command as follows Press and hold the CTRL key on your terminal keyboard then press the U key Release both keys and press the car riage return Exit EDIT using the ER Exit and Replace command at the line mode prompt fol lowed by a carriage return er 2 6 Getting Started Tutorial Running EDIT EDIT The EDIT 1000 program can be accessed from either the RTE Command Interpreter CI or the RTE File Manager FMGR user interface The examples provided in this tutorial use the CI prompt CI gt Note that on some systems the CI prompt includes a decimal point and a number This is your CI program number and it is based on your session number The runstring EDIT initiates the EDIT 1000 program There are many variations of the EDIT runstring that you can use to execute commands and set options The most common variation is to include a filename in the EDIT runstring to access a specific text file A space or a comma must be used between the EDIT command and the filename If you are using FMGR you must use acomma For more on the EDIT runstring and its capabilities refer to Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Operations The following example illustrates the use of the EDIT runstring from the Command Interpreter CI and the typical system response CI gt edit EDIT Use for help FI lt file name gt specif
182. ffects only the pending line Delimiter for the pattern and its substitute use matching punctuation marks with the exception of commas and spaces All three delimiters must be used when any option or OK prompt suppression is used If no options are used the last delimiter may be omitted The default pattern and substitute for exchange commands may be used by omitting the pattern delimiters and substitute To view the current pattern and substitute defaults use the SH command for any of the exchange commands G U X and Y To default the pattern and substitute but specify an option enter G lt option gt For more information refer to the section on pattern defaults in Chapter 3 Pattern to be located See previous section in Chapter 3 on pattern specifications If Regular Expressions is set to ON the metacharacters can be used for unique pattern matches refer to Chapter 5 for more on Regular Expressions If the pattern is omitted EDIT uses the default pattern for Finds Pattern to replace the search pattern specified first in the command string Substitute pattern can be longer or shorter or shorter than the search pattern EDIT inserts or deletes characters as necessary Optional no window flag Enter the N option to disregard the horizontal window columns setting and allow a match anywhere on a line To see setting for window columns use SH WC command R Optional remove flag The R option removes empty zero leng
183. g an I O mapping operation Indicates that the distributed system to which the terminal is mapped does not have the current DS software installed Enter an A if terminal is connected to an A Series system or enter an E if terminal is connected to an E or F Series system Install current software Time stamp found Informational message displayed during the read operation indicating that a time stamp was located in the file None required Time stamping output file Informational message displayed in response to a WR Write and Replace ER Exit and Replace WC Write and Create or EC Exit and Create command issued for a file that has been time stamped by EDIT None required To put work file on cartridge xx use RU EDIT S xx file Informational message displayed when EDIT run command cannot be completed due to insufficient disk space Consult with System Manager to obtain additional disk space or run EDIT using the S option specifying a directory indicated by the xx in the message on an LU Logical disk storage Unit that contains sufficient space For more information refer to the section on Recovering From Errors in Chapter 1 Window n n Informational message displayed after execution of an F Find or X Exchange command Indicates the search window size that was used for the search Displayed only if no matches to the pattern were located and the window size used for the search was
184. g clean up of the scratch directory This is considered a dangerous command because it has the potential to delete data that you meant to save To prevent this from happening EDIT displays an OK prompt after entry of the AS command If desired the OK prompt can be suppressed Examples Figure 4 2 illustrates the use of the AS command to abort EDIT saving the work file The ER Exit and Replace command is used to save the file following the recovery operation as OK y EDIT aborted by user Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 1 28 end of edit CI gt CI gt edit File already exists EDInn 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 256 128 Work file EDInn 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 512 128 EDIT Use for help Entering recover mode 4 lines recovered er testfile Opened file TESTFILE H Closed file TESTFILE H end of edit CI gt ERMAN 4 1 28 ERMAN 4 1 28 Figure 4 2 AS Abort and Save Work File Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 3 B Find a Pattern Uses Command Default Command Syntax 4 4 EDIT 1000 Commands linespec 1 linespec 2 pattern e Use to search your work file from the beginning of the file for a line containing the pattern specified Letter options may be used to specify a multiple search to locate more than one occurrence of the pattern e Use with Set option RE Regular Expressions set to ON to search using the regular expression me
185. g the line number at the EDIT prompt or by using a search command to locate a line that contains a specific character string To access the last line of a file one of the end of file characters or gt can be entered at the EDIT prompt When a line number is entered EDIT positions the work file so that the specified line is the pending line When a search command is entered EDIT searches the work file until the requested pattern is located That line then becomes the new pending line and is displayed on the terminal The EDIT 1000 program can be used to edit files that are up to 32 500 lines records long Files that exceed that limit will be truncated when they are read by EDIT In EDIT files are specified using the standard RTE naming convention file descriptor or file namr The file descriptor namr consists of several user definable parameters such as file type file size security code for File Manager files the directory location of the file and the system node location where the file is stored When EDIT is run certain default parameters are assumed for each file name entered If the default parameters for the file are acceptable you enter only the file name when specifying a file However if any of the parameters are to be specified in the command the position of those that are omitted must be indicated by a colon For more information on file descriptors refer to the appropriate manual for the RTE
186. gle exchange flag The S option allows at most one exchange per line Remarks The Y command functions as an exchange X command on the pending line and then as a Find F command The specified search pattern is copied to the default Find buffer This allows the following find command to use the specified pattern without re entry In this way you can walk through your file executing exchanges by entering a Y or going on to the next match by entering an F The Undo UN command reverses the Y command Examples Figure 4 51 illustrates the use of the Y command to exchange the string COMMAND to command This is an example of the Y command y COMMAND command 00057 This is an example of the Y command This COMMAND will not be exchanged However this COMMAND will be exchanged y 00062 However this command will be exchanged This is the next COMMAND located Figure 4 51 Y Exchange and Search Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 91 EDIT 1000 Non Alphanumeric Commands 4 92 PR lt space gt EDIT 1000 Commands EDIT 1000 provides several non alphanumeric commands that are used in the editing process They include Used to place sequence numbers at the end of all lines in the file Used to access online quick reference or Help Same as the H command mnemonic Used to display the version of the EDIT program being run the source file being edited and the action that an ER command would perfor
187. gular Expressions If a null pattern is entered the Find default pattern is used Pattern to replace the search pattern specified first in the command string Substitute pattern can be longer or shorter or shorter than the search pattern EDIT inserts or deletes characters as necessary to fill the line Optional no window flag Enter the N option to disregard the horizontal window columns setting and allow a match anywhere on a line To see setting for window columns use SH WC command Q Optional quiet flag Enter the Q option to indicate the total number of exchanges without listing the matched lines R Optional remove flag Removes null blank lines after an exchange is executed S Optional single exchange flag The S option allows only one exchange per line Suppresses the OK prompt displayed when changes have been made Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the X command The X command is similar to the G command except that the X command provides a summary listing of the lines affected by the exchange the G command does not Examples Figure 4 50 illustrates the use of the X command to replace the word addition with the word edition and to delete columns 11 through 19 The L List command was used to display the file prior to the changes and the SE Set command was used to set the left column of the search window to column 11 and to turn on Regular Expressions 1 x addition edition OK y The second ed
188. gure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 List of Illustrations RTE A Hello Program Meninas Rene eae ewes 1 5 Overview of EDIT Operations for an Existing File 1 9 Screen EXAMPLE a See Vee Swe ek et 1 12 EDIT 1000T f rial p cok ou eats pany mendes AE 2 3 Tutorial Map Part 1 Screen Mode Editing 0 2 4 Example of Screen Brackets 26 lt lt neicwk ce eee ew ees bees eae abe ew ee 2 5 Example of Screen Brackets ma cea a ia a bees 2 11 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the Tutorial Part1 2 13 TESTFILE Screen Display First Screen 0 0 0 0 eee eae 2 14 TESTFILE Screen Display Second Screen 0 000 000 2 14 TESTFILE Screen Display After Use of AS oooooomo mmmom o 2 16 Tutorial Map Part 2 Line Commands From Screen Mode 2 18 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the Tutorial Part2 2 19 Example of the Online Reference Display for the SH Command 2 21 Example of Window W Command Output 04 2 23 Tutorial Map Part 3 Efficient Editing ooooooooocmmmm m 2 26 TESTFILE Sample Text File for the
189. h Use SE LE n to set line length Examples Figure 4 5 illustrates the use of the SE Set command to set the line length LE to 30 The BK command is then used to delete all characters beyond column 30 Finally the L List command is used to display the change se le 30 OK y Line length ILL 2345678901234567890123456789 The oil man was lost without bk 123456789012345678901234567890 The oil man was lost without h Figure 4 5 BK Kill Trailing Blanks and Truncate Lines Command Example 4 8 EDIT 1000 Commands BM Block Move Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 startcol stopcol destcol Q Remarks Use to move a rectangle of text from one area to another area in the work file This command enables cut and paste editing 1 BM 1 256 1 linespec 1 linespec 2 BM startcol stopcol destcol Q Optional line range that indicates height of text rectangle to be moved If no line range is specified BM moves only the line above the current pending See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Starting and stopping column numbers for the block move Indicates width of rectangle to be moved Stop column is optional If omitted it defaults to last column determined by length of the line on a line by line basis If both start and stop columns are included they must be separated by a colon Optional destination
190. h a filename EDIT attempts to create a file If the create fails because the file entered already exists EDIT opens the file and then displays the EDIT 1000 Operations 3 7 Dating Files OK prompt If the OK prompt is answered with an affirmative entry the data in the existing file is overwritten with the new information For the EC and WC commands the file must not exist before the command is used Use the ER or WR command if the file exists After a file has been created it can be accessed from within an EDIT session by using the File Input FI command at the EDIT prompt The FI command is entered with a filename either an existing or new file If EDIT s current work file has been modified at the time the FI command is used EDIT displays the dangerous command confirmation prompt OK to indicate that data may be lost because recent changes to the current file have not been saved i bunko OK y Closed file SMART HERMAN 4 1 2 Opened file BUNKO HERMAN 4 560 56 155 lines read First line of file After a file has been accessed it is edited using the line mode the screen mode or both editing modes A detailed description of entering commands from both modes is provided under the sections on Line and Screen Mode Editing later in this chapter As you create or modify your files you may want to date them This can be done either manually with the TI command or automatically by creating a time stamp field on
191. hake protocol the examples in this tutorial use T EDIT 1000 typically displays a 21 line screen Your terminal probably has the capacity to display more lines and you may therefore wish to use the X key combination to display an extra large screen Refer to the description of the S command in Chapter 4 EDIT 1000 Commands for more control key combinations Use the control key combinations to move around your new file Use single and double executions to save or ignore edits respectively Practice moving from screen to screen Your editing efficiency will increase as you increase your skill in moving around your text file 13 2 16 Getting Started Tutorial Exiting amp Saving Q U EC ER it q Warning When you are finished editing and are ready to save your work use the U key combination to quit the screen mode As with the other control key combinations a single execution of U saves changes made to the current screen while a double execution ignores new changes The Q key combination can be used instead of the U key combination on terminals that do not use Xon Xoff handshake protocol Because Q can cause problems with Xon Xoff handshake protocol the examples in this tutorial use U The slash prompt indicates that the screen mode has been successfully exited and that you are now in line mode At this point your work can be saved as a new file or the original file can be updated with the new edi
192. haracter class in this case the C The pattern specifies a match to lines containing an A followed by a B followed by zero or more occurrences of the letter C The first line does not match because it does not contain the literal character B The second third and fourth line match The fifth line does not match because the A and B are not next to each other The command F A matches the boxed items in the following sample text aaaaaaaa Figure 5 10 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F A The pattern requires a match to zero or more occurrences of the letter A The first line a null blank line matches because it contains zero occurrences of A The second and third lines match because they contain one or more AS One or More The zero or more occurrence metacharacter often matches Match Character more than is expected The plus sign metacharacter can be used to match one or more occurrences of a specified character or character class For example the command f abc matches the boxed items in the following text abcccccccc acbe Figure 5 11 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F abc In the preceding example the line with just the AB does not match because the pattern requires there to be at least one C The match can extend to many C s as shown by the fourth line EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 13 Pattern Repeat Angle Brackets lt n gt Note that use of the plus metacharacte
193. he OK prompt displayed when changes have been made Remarks If changes have been made to the work file this is considered a dangerous command because it has the potential to delete data that you meant to save To prevent this from happening EDIT displays an OK prompt after entry of the A command If desired the OK prompt can be suppressed Examples Figure 4 1 illustrates the use of the A command with the OK prompt The third example shows use of the A command with a slash to suppress the OK prompt Command not executed a OK y EDIT aborted by user Closed file TESTFILE end of edit CI gt a EDIT aborted by user Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 1 end of edit CI gt Figure 4 1 A Abort Command Examples 4 2 EDIT 1000 Commands AS Abort and Save Work File Uses Use to abort the EDIT session but save the work file The next time the EDIT program is executed EDIT enters the recover mode to recover the changes made prior to your use of the AS command Refer to Chapter 3 for an explanation of recovery mode Command AS Syntax Suppresses the OK prompt Remarks The next time EDIT 1000 is scheduled from the same session number the program enters the recover mode and recovers the file you were working on when you executed the AS command Note that until recover is run the affected file may be inadvertently deleted by any user on the system for example durin
194. he current pending line the current pending line and 10 lines below the current pending line The EDIT option that controls how many lines are displayed is SD Screen Default and this option can be changed by using the SE Set command Refer to the description of the SE command in Chapter 4 EDIT 1000 Commands Your terminal memory limits the number of lines that can be displayed at a time The terminal limit can be viewed by using the SH Show command to display the SL Maximum Screen Mode Lines option To access the screen mode enter the S Screen command at the EDIT prompt followed by a carriage return A beginning and end ing screen bracket should be displayed at the top of the screen 3 The EDIT text screen is bracketed by a beginning line and an ending line which show the line numbers of the first and last lines of text displayed on the screen The beginning line also displays the command that must be used to exit screen mode and return to line mode CTRL U to save the new screen edits or CTRL U CTRL U to ignore new screen edits both followed by a carriage return Text is entered between the beginning and ending screen brackets Refer to Figure 2 4 for an example of the screen brackets and to the next section for instructions on entering text PORRA LAO LARA AA RARE CEE Uo reads con Unchrl Us aborts r lt lt gt gt line EOF TESTFILE lt lt Figure 2 4 Example of Screen Brackets Note that
195. he specified pattern For example the command f and would locate the first occurrence of the word AND and the command f and a would locate all occurrences of AND The A option is described further in the section Search and Exchange Command Options in this chapter For more information on the F and B commands refer to the command descriptions in Chapter 4 of this manual Note that the command separator default is a literal character inside a pattern Therefore if another command is to be included in the command string the find pattern must be terminated with a matching delimiter The exchange commands G X and Y are used to exchange all occurrences of a match pattern with a substitute string within the line range specified in the command The pattern syntax for an exchange command is lt match pattern gt lt substitute pattern gt The G Character Exchange on Pending Line and X Exchange commands locate a pattern and replace it with the substitute string specified The only difference between the G and X commands is that X command provides a summary report of the lines exchanged and the G command does not The following exchange EDIT 1000 Operations 3 19 Pattern Defaults 3 20 EDIT 1000 Operations command would change all occurrences of the word funky with distasteful 1 X funky distasteful The U Unconditional Exchange command has the same pattern syntax as the exchange commands but behaves differently
196. ich editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of the terminal and can also move the window forward or backward any number of lines within the file The user is working directly with single keystroke commands which are often faster and more convenient to use than the line edit commands of the editor gt gt line EOF ESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 38 Figure 2 7 TESTFILE Screen Display Second Screen Note the two line overlap between screens EDIT typically displays two lines from the previously displayed screen In this case EDIT starts the display of the second screen with line 20 The command used to go from the first to the second screen and vice versa is presented under the section on Moving Between Screens which follows Moving Around in The EDIT 1000 screen mode provides control key combinations Screen Mode that enable you to move around in the screen mode In this manual the CONTROL key is typically abbreviated with the up caret symbol or the letters CTRL 2 14 Getting Started Tutorial Note Moving between Screens F P S T X To execute control key commands hold down the CTRL key and press the appropriate alpha key then release both keys Follow this by a carriage return Be sure to release the CTRL key before pressing the carriage return Many control key combinations serve a double purpose A single execution of a control key combination r
197. ies file to edit EOF The prompt character for the EDIT 1000 line mode is the slash mark This character can be changed using the EDIT SE Set command For instructions on changing the prompt character refer to the description of the SE command in Chapter 4 EDIT 1000 Commands The following example illustrates the entry of the EDIT runstring with a specific filename CI gt REC EDIT Use for help Opened file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 28 lines read This is line one of the file FIRST If the filename entered does not exist EDIT allows you to enter the editing session but informs you that the file does not exist and that you can enter text and create the file by exiting the session with an ER Exit and Replace command This command is described in detail at the end of Part 1 of the tutorial The response displayed by EDIT in this situation follows CI gt edit new EDIT Use for help No such file NEW An ER or the first WR will create it EOF Getting Started Tutorial 2 7 er Exiting EDIT without Saving A E e 2 8 Getting Started Tutorial If you are logged on and have a CI gt prompt enter the command EDIT TESTFILE and press the carriage return If you change your mind about editing or have made changes that you don t want to save you can use the A Abort command to exit the EDIT program The A command returns you to the RTE user interface CI or FMGR and ign
198. in Figure 2 4 the bottom screen bracket indicates that you are at the end of the file EOF The bottom screen bracket also provides the filename for the file being edited TESTFILE in this example If you are editing an existing file the bottom bracket will also include the name of your RTE working directory and several numbers that indicate characteristics of your file such as file size and type Getting Started Tutorial 2 11 Inserting and The EDIT 1000 screen mode enables you to use the local terminal editing keys to enter text Keys marked as INS LINE and INS Deleting Text CHAR are used to insert lines and characters respectively On most terminals pressing the INS CHAR key allows you to insert characters at the location of the cursor until the key is pressed again Keys marked as DEL LINE and DEL CHAR are used to delete lines and characters respectively On some terminals lines and characters are inserted and deleted using the soft function keys rather than marked keys Before typing in lines of new text you must insert several blank lines To do this position the cursor on the bottom screen bracket and use the INS LINE key function key Insert enough lines so that you do not type over the beginning or ending screen brackets If the screen brackets are deleted or typed over EDIT is unable to recognize the text boundaries and displays the following error message when you attempt to save the screen edits Start and or Stop
199. in Screen Mode cece cece eee eee cee ener eeseteees Moving between Screens F B S T AX er ee ee ay en Exiting amp Saving Q U EC ER qeria A Beer Aes Zoe Part2 Line Mode Commands s pesty esee rere AA Rags RS Contents and Sample Pileta id re E ARSS Entering Line Commands from Screen Mode C occccccccccccccccooooc Displaying Information H SH 2 cee eee cece eee eee ees Ria 1 I 1 1 Li 1 Nere DOIDDARAAARAAYW NNNNNNNWN OWINAAADIA Finding Out Where You Are N it a A itt eee Nee oe AUS 2 21 Getting Where You Want to BE n 4054 0 sc sa bea e ied Ob eae ed ea IS 2 21 Displaying a Portion of the File L W 0 cece ccc ee eee cence eens 2 22 Marking a Line KX las oto 5a eee tas PROGR ow NGS ESTES wos o EGR GE 2 23 Saving the File without Exiting EDIT WC WR 0 eee eee eee ee 2 24 Tutorial Part 3 Efficient Editing ce oda ew ae Woh oe oR Kaa AA a 2 26 Contents and Sample File os ti Ad Pees ete eles oe 2 26 Copying Text CO tees cts Lo a dna peeo hee olla ee poso ta ea 2 28 Undoing Commands UN corpo tire ou duteg os pas cep o s opa aerea Sees 2 29 Moving Tet MO Gt a are torio eee onde Us De pie E aes 2 29 Deletie Text a eee ee A ies ue ose ee 2 29 Merging Files M reri ER DO E I EEA E ES S 2 30 Finding a Pattern BB siera a a atten E E au lee at rs EE an in EER EEA 2 31 Finding All Occurrences of a Pattern A Option 00006 2 32 Dis
200. inal does not support the EDIT 1000 screen mode Use the EDIT 1000 line mode to edit Not found Informational message displayed following execution of a line specification search command Indicates that the pattern specified in a search or exchange command was not found None required OK Command confirmation prompt displayed by EDIT when a command is used that could potentially delete or significantly alter the file text Requires a yes or no response Type y or yes to execute the entered command or n or no to cancel the command Opened file lt filename gt Informational message displayed after user enters an M Merge or TR Transfer command The file opened is listed at the position of lt filename gt None required Operator break Informational message indicating that user terminated execution of a command before completion None required A 8 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Out of disk work space Error message displayed during an EDIT command when there is insufficient space available on the disk to complete the command No additional modifications can be made to the work file First attempt an EC Exit and Create or ER Exit and Replace command then consult with the System Manager to obtain more disk space If EC or ER is unsuccessful use the EC com
201. ine O Duplicate Pending Line and Edit and P Pending Line Edit commands During line character editing text entered with a pending line edit command is applied based on the character edit mode currently active delete mode replace mode and insert mode The character edit mode is determined by the control key command entered following the pending line command Change to Delete characters mode Enter CTRL C first then any non control character for example x for each character to be deleted Change to Replace characters mode Used after a CTRL C or CTRL S Use the current prompt character for characters to be replaced Change to Insert characters mode CTRL I also changes to insert mode if CTRL I does not perform the terminal tab operation EDIT 1000 Operations 3 31 CTRL P Additional Character Edits lt text gt CTRL B CTRL T CTRL X CTRL lt tab gt 3 32 EDIT 1000 Operations Same function as CTRL S Frees CTRL S to be used with XOFF protocols Additional control characters and commands used in line character edits are described below Text to be entered on the pending line To preserve an existing character on the pending line during replace mode use the current prompt character the slash unless changed for each character to be preserved Break the line at this position Move remaining text to column 1 of the next line Truncate line Extend line adding characters to the end of the line A
202. ine line mode 3 32 screen mode 3 37 4 62 through regular expressions 5 18 C C command 3 31 4 11 canceling EDIT 2 8 last change 2 29 capitalizing first letters 5 21 caret character See anchor character carriage return control character 3 26 Case Folding CF option 2 32 2 34 3 19 3 25 3 50 4 4 B 1 CF option 2 32 3 25 changing case of text 5 20 character classes definition B 1 metacharacters 5 10 negated 5 11 range of characters 5 11 checking file size 4 74 CI Command Interpreter See Command Inter preter CI Index 1 closing a file 3 10 a list file 4 20 See also FCL command a source file 3 10 4 21 closure character See metacharacter match zero or more CO command 2 2 2 23 2 25 2 28 2 38 3 36 4 12 colon character 2 23 command file 3 49 line mode 1 10 number in command string 3 4 options 3 24 B 2 parameters 3 13 parsing 3 21 pattern defaults 2 44 repeat 4 98 review 2 35 separator 3 22 3 32 stack 3 50 stack command 1 2 2 35 4 92 4 96 B 1 string 3 50 B 1 syntax 3 4 3 13 3 15 Command Interpreter CI 1 1 1 3 1 4 1 6 2 2 2 7 2 19 2 27 deleting files 3 11 use of back quotes 3 5 command separator 3 4 3 50 Command Separator CS option 3 25 comment command 4 100 control character B 1 characters codes acknowledge 3 26 carriage return 3 26 delete 3 26 inquire 3 26 line feed 3 26 null 3 26 commands line mo
203. ine range the command line is not repeated Note that the pending line can never be outside of the default line range Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Optional number of times the command line is to be repeated Optional Enter the Quiet Q option to suppress listing of commands repeated EDIT counts backward to zero therefore the number of repetitions is one greater than the number specified Unless the Q option is used EDIT displays the command string or text after each repetition along with the number of repetitions remaining The command line is repeated only if the pending line is between the line spec 1 and line spec 2 inclusive The number of times the command line is repeated is specified by the numeric argument n If the numeric argument is omitted the command line repeats until the pending line is outside the line range specified If the numeric argument is omitted a line range must be specified to prevent a continuous loop An operator break terminates the repeat Any error terminates the repeat EDIT does not allow both a TR Transfer and _ Repeat command on the same command line Figure 4 57 illustrates the use of the repeat command to make 11 copies of a line containing a vertical bar for use in a table SE CS is entered to set a new command separator then the lt space gt command is entered to append a line of text that
204. inespec 1 Optional line specification Use to edit a specific line If omitted the command edits the current pending line See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications line character edits This command enables the use of line character edits including text entry and use of control CTRL keys The line character edit options are briefly described following For more information refer to the Line Mode Character Editing section in Chapter 3 CTRL B Break the line at this position Move remaining text to next line CTRL C Delete characters CTRL R Replace characters CTRL S Insert character CTRL P Same function as CTRL S Frees CTRL S to be used with Xoff protocols CTRL T Truncate line CTRL X Extend line adding characters to the end of the line CTRL A non printing escape character It is the same as but it does not print It cannot be redefined Current prompt default saves corresponding character lt text gt Replacement text to be entered on the pending line Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the C command If the first character of the line edit text is O it must be preceded by the escape character default so EDIT does not interpret the entry as a CO Copy command Examples Figure 4 7 shows the use of the C command For more examples see the Line Mode Editing section in Chapter 3 Illustrating the breaking of a line in
205. ion Options with numeric values cannot be set to zero 0 If a zero is entered EDIT uses the default value If no value is entered and an ON or OFF value is expected EDIT toggles the current value To view a current option setting use the SH lt option gt Show Option command To view all options and the current settings use the SH ALL Show All command A brief description of the EDIT options is provided in the following tables For more details on the options refer to the section on EDIT Session Options in Chapter 3 Figure 4 37 illustrates the use of the SE command to set the Case Folding option to differentiate between upper and lowercase letters Figure 4 37 SE Set Option Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 69 Table 4 1 EDIT Session Options al Anchor character used in pattern specification Anchors the pattern to the start of search window Asking for verification of dangerous commands that is A AS D FI K TR U X and Y Set to OFF to suppress OK prompt Bell Set to ON to enable bell with EDIT prompt To set line editing graphics sub mode within screen mode Case folding Must be set to OFF to differentiate between upper and lower case in pattern searches Command separator Used to separate commands in a command or runstring Display functions Applies to the screen mode display of display enhancements such as blinking and inverse video and control characters Escape character
206. ion begins at line one the beginning of the file If no line specification is used for the F command the search Find operation begins after the current pending line The search example in this tutorial uses the F Find command because it is mnemonic and is easier to remember With the F command you can locate just the first occurrence or all occurrences of a given character string within a given line range This is done by using the A All option in the F command string The character string to be located is specified between any matching set of punctuation marks except commas and blanks which are used to separate elements of the command string The most common set of delimiters used are slashes For example to find the first occurrence of the word COLOUR you would enter the command Ai zfeolewmizc Note that if you aren t at line one you must enter a one with the Find command to start at the beginning of the file However if you wanted to find the first occurrence of the string Xon Xoff you would use a punctuation mark other than the slash for a delimiter The following command would work in this instance Foil Elon zO Getting Started Tutorial 2 31 Finding All Occurrences With the F command you can locate just the first occurrence of a of a Pattern A Option string or all occurrences of the string within a given line range This is done by using the A All option in the F command string For example to find al
207. ion characters It also matches the zero length string between the start of each line and the first character as well as the one at the end of each line For example the command F xyzzy matches the boxed items in the following text abcd defg qwert tasdf hgijkl vbnm XyzzY0 rtyu 9XyzzY il abxyzzycd abcd dcba Figure 5 15 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy The first line in the preceding example illustrates that a match can occur in the center of a line The second shows that it can occur at the end of a line The third line illustrates that a match can occur at the start of a line and that a plus sign is considered a non alphanumeric In the fourth line the first occurrence of xyzzy does not match because it is followed by the digit zero and the second occurrence does not match because it is preceded by the digit nine The third occurrence on the fourth line is a match since it is followed by an underscore _ The fifth line illustrates that the alphanumeric transition metacharacter is useful for building patterns that match complete words and do not match sub strings within words The alphanumeric transition metacharacter can be used to find occurrences of variable names in source code unless the underscore is used as part of a variable name 5 16 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Tagged String Braces xyz EDIT Regular Expressions provides a notation for exchange commands that enables you
208. ion of the file descriptor followed by three dots The screen mode may be started from the pending line or any line specified For example Table 3 5 Examples of Screen Mode Commands Start screen around pending line Start screen from line 100 Start screen 45 lines before pending line Run EDIT from Cl and start edit lt file gt s screen from line 1 Start a large screen from current pending line Start a large screen from ten lines above the current pending line 3 34 EDIT 1000 Operations For example for the file LEMON the command 22 S would display the screen illustrated in Figure 3 4 gt gt xxx Line 22 X X X X CTRL U reads CTRL U CTRL U aborts lt lt KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKK KkKKKK KkKKK KKKK KKK KKK KKK K kK K kkk kkk KkK KKK kkk K K KkKK KK K KkKKKK aKkKKKK KkKKK KkKKK K K K KKK KKK K kK K kkk KK kkk KkK KK KK KKKK KKK KKKKK KKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LEMON 41 4 Figure 3 4 Sample Screen Mode Display Screen Display EDIT typically displays 21 lines of text at a time 10 lines above the pending line the pending line and 10 lines below the pending line To display a larger screen use the CTRL X command described below This displays the maximum number of lines allowed by the terminal The screen size can be checked with the SH SD Show Screen Default command and the maximum lines allowed
209. is still open when EDIT is exited EDIT automatically closes the file Examples Figure 4 13 illustrates the use of the FCL command to close a list file after it is created using the L command 1 200 wow 41 Created file WOW 41 4 Posted file WOW fel Closed file WOW 41 4 Figure 4 13 FCL File Close List Command Example 4 20 EDIT 1000 Commands FCS File Close Source Uses e Use to close the current source file so that it can be accessed by other programs e Use to close the current source file without changes allowing you to continue to access the work file to carry out tasks such as disk packing e Use to prevent accidentally overwriting with the ER or WR commands while working with a file when you wish no further changes to the source file Command FCS Syntax Remarks Note that this command separates the work file from the source file so that there is no default filename for the ER and WR commands If these commands are used a filename must be specified If the filename for the source file closed is specified the source file is re opened The default source filename continues to be displayed and is available even if the source file has been closed using the FCS command Examples Figure 4 14 illustrates the use of the FCS command to close the source file LEMON The Display Source File Status command is used to display the status of the file LEMON eS Closed file LEMON HERMAN 4 1 8 EOF
210. is the original line 11 Do you spell your name with a V Mrs Vagner Original line 12 The answer is Signed Karnak Do you spell your name with a V Mrs Vagner Original line 12 zeslo mO The answer is Original line 8 Nein W Original line 9 Signed Karnak Original line 10 FLW I m going to move the original lines 8 10 to below the original line 12 This is the original line 11 Do you spell your name with a V Mrs Vagner Original line 12 The answer is Original line 8 Nein W Original line 9 Signed Karnak Original line 10 EOF Figure 4 31 MO Move Command Example 4 52 EDIT 1000 Commands N Display Line Number Uses Use to display the line number of the current pending line Command N Syntax Examples N 316 Figure 4 32 N Display Line Number Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 53 n Specific Line Number Uses Command Syntax linespec Remarks Examples Original pending Enter a line number or linespec to display a specific line and make it the current pending line linespec The linespec number n entered is a string of numbers or some other line specification character Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on line specifications When specifying a line number remember that lines are re numbered each time lines are added deleted or moved within the EDIT session If two line specifications are
211. ith an O This prevents EDIT from interpreting it as a Move MO command In all other cases a delimiter is optional Examples Figure 4 30 illustrates the use of the M command to merge file RIDI into file CULOUS and to merge a file using a line range torres Opened file CULOUS HERMAN 4 2 36 7 lines read This is line 1 of the file CULOUS I m going to merge RIDI into CULOUS M2 i S Opened file RIDI HERMAN 4 2 38 3 lines read Closed file RIDI HERMAN 4 2 38 his is line 4 his will be the last line of RIDI merged into CULOUS his is li of the file CULOUS I m going to merge RIDI into CULOUS his is li CULOUS RIDI will be inserted below this line his is li Only lines 2 through 4 of RIDI will be merged into CULOUS his is line 4 This will be the last line of RIDI merged into CULOUS his is line 5 of CULOUS RIDI should be merged above m roads 40000 50000 Opened file ROADS HERMAN 4 2 38 10001 lines read Closed file ROADS HERMAN 4 2 38 Line 50 000 of file ROADS Figure 4 30 M Merge Command Example 4 50 EDIT 1000 Commands MO Move Uses Command Default Command Syntax Remarks Examples linespec 1 linespec 2 e Use from the line mode to move a number of lines to below the pending line The lines moved are deleted from their previous location e Use in conjunction with the Kx Mark Line command to move blocks of text
212. ithout a list file descriptor For FMGR files specify the full file descriptor to ensure that the file is placed on the intended cartridge The Undo UN command reverses the K command The undo does not effect the list file Figure 4 25 illustrates the use of the K command to delete the current line to delete an entire file to delete the remainder of a file to delete 10 lines beginning at the pending line and to delete lines 1 through 45 The last two examples illustrate how to delete a marked line range and place it in the file PARTTXT and how to append a marked line range to the list file currently open k Displays new pending line ALS OK y This was line number a is now line number 1 AO carl Opened file PART TXT HERMAN 4 Posted file PART TXT HERMAN 4 AECI Posted file PART TXT HERMAN 4 Figure 4 25 K Kill Lines Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 37 Kx Mark a Line Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 Remarks Examples 4 38 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to mark a line for future reference by using a colon and any letter a through z in a baseline specification Marks are displayed in screen mode as a colon and letter in the far right margin outside the text entry area e Use marked lines in conjunction with the CO Copy and MO Move commands to copy and move blocks of text linespec 1 Kx Optional line number Defaults to th
213. ition of the manual was the most accurate 123456789012345678901234567890 222222222233333333334444444444 333333333344444444445555555555 444444444455555555556666666666 se we 11 Search window columns se re on Regular expressions E 3 0 fy 00001 123456789001234567890 00002 222222222234444444444 00003 333333333345555555555 00004 444444444456666666666 Limit 4 matches CF RE 44444444456666666666 Figure 4 50 X Exchange Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 89 Y Exchange and Search Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 pattern substitute N 4 90 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to exchange a pattern with a new pattern on the current line and then find the next occurrence of the pattern Use instead of the other exchange commands G U X when there is a need to check the match before executing the exchange e Use with RE Regular Expressions set to ON to use the metacharacters for pattern matching Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on Regular Expressions Y last pattern specified last substitute specified linespec 1 Y pattern substitute N Q R S Optional A beginning line may be specified for the start of the search May be either absolute numbers or line specification characters If omitted the search begins at the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Delimiter fo
214. itten into the new work file A new source file is then created with the EC Exit and Create command and a filename The EC command terminates the editing session and displays the following message ec smart Created file SMART MIRIAM 4 1 Closed file SMART MIRIAM 4 1 end of edit CIS In the situation where the EDIT session is initiated with a filename that does not exist the session can also be terminated with the ER Exit and Replace command as follows er Created file SMART MIRIAM 4 1 Closed file SMART end of edit CIS Files can also be created without leaving the edit session by using the WC Write and Create the WR Write and Replace the L List and the K Kill or delete commands The WC command works in the same manner as the EC command except that it does not terminate EDIT but returns to the current pending line after creating the file specified The WR command works similar to the ER command so that when the use of an ER creates a file the use of a WR will also create a file The L and K commands can create a new file by copying L or deleting K lines from an existing file and listing them to a new file Note that the L and K commands can also be used to append text to an existing file by entering a plus sign before the filename Examples of the WC L and K commands follow To create a new file named EDSIL enter the command we edsil 41 18 4 Created file EDSIL 41 18 4 Closed file
215. ject He often warned co workers Don t get too confident the light at the e the end of the tunnel might be a train gt gt line EOF LEMON 41 4 lt lt Figure 4 26 Kx Mark a Line Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 39 L List Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 max list filedescriptor 4 40 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to display a block of lines Defaults to display 20 lines e Use with a filename descriptor to copy the lines and list them to either a new or existing file e Use the LN version of this command to list lines with line numbers Once this command is used all lines listed using the L command are displayed with line numbers until the numbering option is turned off using the LU command For more refer to the sections on the LN and LU commands e Use to list a file or portion of a file to a printer while in an EDIT session see examples following L20 linespec 1 linespec 2 L max list filedescriptor Optional line range May be absolute numbers separated by a space or a comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Note that EDIT only accepts a range that lists lines in ascending order For example EDIT does not accept a line range such as 10 5 If both range limits are omitted the L command default is the current pen
216. k padded to the starting window column EDIT 1000 Commands 4 81 Examples Figure 4 44 illustrates the use of the U command to delete the first eight characters on all lines of a file suppressing the listing and the prompt In the second example the U command is used to replace the first two characters with the string 11111 suppressing the prompt with a slash 1 u xxxxxxxx Q fi 8 u aa 11111 Figure 4 44 U Unconditional Exchange Command Examples 4 82 EDIT 1000 Commands UN Undo Uses Use to reverse the last file modification command executed Command UN Syntax Remarks This command can be used after the BC BK BM C CO D G I J K M MO O P Q R SC TL TK U X or Y commands An undo list of the last change made is maintained by EDIT The most recent change can be viewed by using the SH UN Show Undo command The UN command should not be used after the UY Undo List Yank command The UY command rearranges the order of lines in the file but does not alter the Undo list Therefore use of the UN command does not restore the file to its original state before use of the UY command or before the command that built the undo list In some cases use of the UN command after the UY command may also delete data Examples Figure 4 45 illustrates the use of the UN command to reverse a G Exchange on pending line and an X Exchange command This is the pending line g the a This is a pending line un
217. ks the current pending line If desired a single line specification can be entered prior to the Kx command to mark a specific line other than the pending line For example the command 4 kb would mark line four with a b To mark a line from screen mode you can either use C to access the line mode and mark the desired line as described above or you can use the control key combination K To use the latter method position your cursor on the line to be marked then enter K followed by a carriage return EDIT places a colon in the right hand margin of the line and positions your cursor to the right of the colon Enter the desired alpha character Line marks entered in screen mode must be saved by reading the screen single execution of one of the control commands If you mark more than one line with the same alpha character EDIT applies the mark to the last line found during the screen read The WC Write and Create and WR Write and Replace commands are used to save a file without exiting the editing session These commands can be used to save a file prior to major changes so that if these changes are not satisfactory you can revert to the version of the file saved prior to the changes without losing the rest of your file WC and WR are also used when you wish to save a file but continue editing on another file Suppose you have just entered about 200 lines of commands in a file that is approximately 1000 lines long You need to d
218. l occurrences of the word COLOUR enter the command M i colomz a Suppose you had entered this command with the current pending line at line 50 If you had not specified the line range this command would have located all occurrences of COLOUR from line 51 to the end of the file missing those located in the text between line 1 and line 50 n Enter commands to find the first occurrence of the word EDIT all g occurrences of the word EDIT and all occurrences of the word EDIT between line 11 and line 26 Note how the matched lines are listed after execution of the command Distinguishing between When the F command is used with the A option EDIT finds all Uppercase and Lower occurrences of the specified string disregarding whether the string case occurs in uppercase and or lowercase To distinguish between uppercase and lowercase alpha characters set the Case Folding option to OFF using the SE Set command prior to entering the F command For example to find all occurrences of the word COLOUR in all uppercase letters enter the commands illustrated in Figure 2 16 ESG Case Folding 1 COLOUR a 01177 of the word COLOUR you would enter the command 01179 1 F COLOUR 01192 of the word COLOUR use U to escape screen m 01195 1 F COLOUR A 01199 this command would have located all COLOUR 01215 word COLOUR in all upper case letters enter 01220 1 F COLOUR A EOF 7 matches Figure 2 16 Exam
219. le enter the following command 5 22 EWC40 1 U character Q SEWC L To return to default window settings Suppress listing of change Character to insert at column 40 The indicates replace with no characters Unconditional exchange command Line range from line 1 to end of file Set window column option to start at column 40 Figure 5 22 Inserting a Character at a Specific Column To insert a character at column 40 on all lines except those shorter than 40 characters enter the following command SEREON 1 X lt 40 gt amp character EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Move Columns To switch or move columns of data for example switching column of Data 1 with column 2 where column 1 is figures and column 2 is descriptions enter the following command EREON 1 X lt 20 gt lt 30 gt lt 12 gt amp 3 amp 26 amp 1 0 7 Suppress listing L Recall item 1 Recall item 2 Recall item 3 End of match pattern End of item 3 Item 3 is 12 characters long End of item 2 Item 2 is 30 characters long End of item 1 Item 1 is 20 characters long Anchor pattern to start of line Exchange command Line range from line 1 to end of file Command separator Set regular expressions option to ON Figure 5 23 Moving or Switching Columns of Data Note that all lines to be moved must be at least as long as the total of all the defined field lengths 62 chara
220. le NEWTESTFILE HERMAN 4 18 38 89 lines read First line of text Eal Note that the source file is not closed until a new file NEWTESTFILE is input You have reached the end of Part 2 of the tutorial If you were trying out the exercises as they were discussed what command should you use at this point to exit and save your file If you said ER Exit and Replace you are right Getting Started Tutorial 2 25 Tutorial Part 3 Efficient Editing Contents and This portion of the tutorial provides instructions on useful Sample File EDIT 1000 commands that enable you to copy move and delete text undo reverse commands merge EDIT files search and exchange character strings and use the EDIT command stack to speed up the editing process The flow chart in Figure 2 13 illustrates the contents of Part 3 of the tutorial The sample file illustrated in Figure 2 14 has been used for the examples in this section COPYING TEXT CO Seay UNDOING COMMANDS UN FINDINGA REPEATING A PATTERN PREVIOUS COMMAND wD SAVING UE a EXCHANGING A PATTERN ER X G Figure 2 13 Tutorial Map Part 3 Efficient Editing 2 26 Getting Started Tutorial If you would like to try the exercises described in this tutorial the sample file used is the same as the sample text file entered in Part 1 of the tutorial If you did not enter the sample text file in Part 1 of the t
221. letters if CF off For example 0 9 refers to the range of zero through nine and matches any single number within that range In the previous example the minus sign does not have a special meaning because there is a plus sign before it Left square brackets within a character class are literal left square brackets A right square bracket outside of the character class is a literal right square bracket If there is not a closing right square bracket the character class is terminated by the end delimiter of the pattern For example the command FLS X CD C performs exchanges on all lines that start with any of the four characters C D or and replaces the pattern with a C To expand on the explanation of character class ranges note that the pattern a z0 9 matches any character in the range a through z or in the range 0 through 9 Character classes are an OR function if any one of the members of the character class set matches the corresponding character in the line of text then the character class has been matched Character class negation allows you to specify the characters that you do not want to be matched A character class is negated by including an caret as the first character after the left square bracket EDIT then matches any line except those that contain the characters in the negated character class EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 11 For example the command F x 4 Z0 9 y matches the bo
222. line 10 with an A 1 F OK F TEH 10 59 K 10 L 11 10 X AUG SEPT 1 10 or 10 10 40 W lP CAKE CAKE Ss 20 5 MO 1 40 P 1980 5 P Aug x iy MO 10KA EDIT 1000 Operations 3 17 Pattern Specification 3 18 EDIT 1000 Operations EDIT provides several commands for which patterns can be specified The search F and B and exchange G X and Y commands all use patterns to locate specific character strings in text files A pattern is a string of characters to be searched for matched or substituted There are two methods of pattern matching possible with EDIT 1000 standard pattern matching and pattern matching that uses the Regular Expressions option to search for more involved or generalized patterns Standard pattern matching is described in this section and is assumed throughout the majority of this manual as it is the default matching for the EDIT program Regular Expressions pattern matching is described in Chapter 5 A match occurs when a line is found containing the pattern specified in the search or exchange command Depending on the command EDIT indicates the match by either making the line located the pending line or as in a multiple search by listing the lines matched A match occurs if a specified pattern is found anywhere within the horizontal search window The search window is applied during searches However a match outside the wi
223. line not found O saves original text written to screen S saves text just read from screen B saves both inserts screen text before original text What should be saved The safest response is to enter a B if you are not sure about the status of your text This saves both the original text and the text that was currently being displayed You can then delete whatever text is erroneous or redundant EDIT does not provide a wrap around facility You must therefore use a carriage return at the end of each line If you continue typing most terminals will wrap the text However the text is wrapped after the 78th character and not necessarily between words Note You can continue to insert blank lines for text entry even if the beginning screen bracket is rolled off the top of your terminal screen as long as you do not have more than 24 consecutive blank lines when the screen is read The screen is read by EDIT when you enter a control key command to either move around the text file or exit the screen mode See following sections If you must have more than 24 blank lines in your text enter a blank space on each line 2 12 Getting Started Tutorial Type in the sample text illustrated in Figure 2 5 Practice using the insert line key to add lines before typing text the cursor arrow keys to move around the screen the insert character key and the delete char acter and line keys Remember to use a carriage return at the end of
224. ll be deleted from the display and the rest of the line will be shifted left to fill in the gap After all of the desired deletions have been made move the cursor to the end of the line and press the ENTER key Do not delete the delimiter at the beginning of the line For example Q ABCDEFGHIJKL Position cursor under the G press the DELETE CHAR key three times move the cursor to the end of the line and press ENTER ABCDEFJKL Edited line is displayed When EDIT is invoked in a multipoint environment the TAB key on the terminal is enabled the EDIT tab character remains on The tab stops are initially set to columns 7 and 21 These may be changed using the SET TAB and CLEAR TAB keys on the terminal The TAB key may be used to position the cursor at any time It is equivalent to moving the cursor using the terminal keys with arrows on them EDIT 1000 in a Multipoint Environment D 3 index Symbols help command 2 20 4 92 4 94 RM help on recovery 3 47 command 4 92 4 95 default a parameter 3 36 space command 3 32 end of file 2 21 character See indefinite character option See append option n n See line specification B runstring option 3 3 L runstring option 3 3 Q runstring option 3 4 R runstring option 3 4 S runstring option 3 4 3 47 line specification character 3 15 command stack command 2 35
225. ls set by the user for future reference to the line Maintained by EDIT Marks are valid for each session match A pattern to be located matching either a specified pattern or all except the specified pattern metacharacter A set of special characters with unique meanings to EDIT These characters are used in regular expression searches and exchanges These characters can be checked online with RE namr Standard RTE FMGR disk file designation In EDIT usually means a filename with optional security code and cartridge reference number separated by File type and size are sometimes used in creating a file from EDIT options Either an optional parameter in a command string or an initial EDIT condition that can be changed with the set option command Refer to the SE command description for details pattern A character string to be searched exchanged B 2 Glossary range A number of lines with a defined beginning and ending line specification Can be either absolute numbers or line specification characters with or without offsets recovery mode EDIT enters the recovery mode whenever a scratch file is found to already exist No changes can be made screen mode is disabled All other commands are allowed Must abort or exit restoring or creating with a filename before running any editing session regular expressions Special patterns using the metacharacters for unique searches and exchanges Use of regular expressions p
226. lt character used to suppress asking OK for dangerous commands and the place saver character used in line mode character edits Quiet option Set to ON to run EDIT without listing any output to the terminal When EDIT prompts for input quiet mode automatically turns off If you interactively set quiet mode on it looks as if nothing happened because EDIT will prompt for the next command and turn off quiet mode Regular expressions Set to ON to allow the use of Regular Expressions mode metacharacters in special pattern searches matches Find return ON causes an unsuccessful search or an All option search command F or B to return to the original pending line after reaching the second line specification OFF causes EDIT to leave the pending line at one line beyond the second line specification entered 3 26 EDIT 1000 Operations Table 3 3 EDIT Session Options continued option veut ese OOOO Screen size defaults Numbers indicate screen format in the form number of lines displayed above pending line number of lines displayed below pending line and number of lines overlapped Overlapped lines are those displayed from the previous screen as a result of CTRL P or CTRL F commands Screen size is equal to the sum of the first and second number plus one Parameters are separated by blanks or commas Screen mode line limit Sets the maximum number of lines that are displayed for a screen edit If not set by a SE
227. luded Periodi cally update packages are distributed which contain replacement pages to be merged into the manual including an updated copy of this printing history page Also the update may contain write in instructions Each reprinting of this manual will incorporate all past updates however no new information will be added Thus the reprinted copy will be identical in content to prior printings of the same edition with its user inserted update information New editions of this manual will contain new information as well as all updates To determine what manual edition and update is compatible with your current software revision code refer to the Manual Numbering File or the Computer User s Documentation Index The Manual Numbering File is included with your software It consists of an M followed by a five digit product number First Edition AUG 1980 arpionar da cas Update 1 Oct 1981 Scratch File and other enhancements Update 2 JUL 198255 toa Bae Galen Sates RTE A 1 Update 3 2 JUIN T9835 ile ceca eerie cae a Mea bee RTE A Update 4 Dec 1983 Cl file system added to RTE 6 VM Update 5 Jan A ot gle hae eyelet Ripe r Eyi Second Edition Aug t987 iii A ee ee Update 1 0 Jan 1988 Software Revision 5 1 5010 Update 2 Jul 1990 Software Revision 5 2
228. m on the current file Used to list a review of the last 20 commands used Referred to as the Command Stack Used to append add a line of text after the pending line making the appended line the new pending line Repeat command used to repeat a command string or a line of text Used to enter a comment line in a command file All characters on the line following this command are ignored by EDIT A description of each of the above commands follows Sequence Numbers Uses Command Syntax XXX nl n2 Remarks Examples JOY JOY HJOY1 OK y EOF MATA XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Used to place sequence numbers at the end of all lines in the file Places numbers in columns 76 through 80 Fxxx n1 n2 Three character identifier field Can be any three printing characters Follows the command immediately without any delimiting characters Optional starting sequence number to be entered Defaults to 00000 Optional incremental value Defaults to 10 This command is useful in adding sequence numbers to FORTRAN programs It can also be used in combination with a Regular Expressions exchange command to be unique numbers in lines Figure 4 52 illustrates the use of the command In the first attempt there is an illegal space between the command and the 3 character identifier The second attempt is successful The L List command is used to display the text after execution of the command
229. mand Examples 4 86 EDIT 1000 Commands WR Write and Replace Uses Use to replace a file with the new edits without exiting EDIT Command WR lt filedescriptor gt Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Enter the filename descriptor of the file to be replaced The default is the current source file Refer to section on filename descriptors in Chapter 3 Remarks See the ER Exit and Replace command description for remarks regarding file errors If the source file has been closed and is on the working directory the WR command opens the source writes to it and closes it again Examples Figure 4 49 illustrates the use of the WR command to replace the current file LEMON to write to another existing file E2 and to write to the existing file E4 designating the directory and file information wr Posted file LEMON HERMAN 4 1 4 First line of t file wr e2 Opened file E2 HERMAN 4 1 4 Closed file E2 HERMAN 4 1 4 First line of file wc e4 herman 4 1 4 Created file E4 HERMAN 4 1 4 Closed file E4 HERMAN 4 1 4 First line of file Figure 4 49 WR Write and Replace Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 87 X Exchange Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 pattern substitute N 4 88 EDIT 1000 Commands e Use to search for a pattern and exchange it with a new pattern within the line range specified in the command string Use with th
230. mand and specify a directory on an LU Logical storage Unit of the disk that has sufficient space Your System Manager may choose to run EDIT specifying the S option and a directory on a different LU to place your work file in a directory that has adequate space For more information on how to recover from the Out of Disk Work Space message refer to the section on Recovering From Errors in Chapter 3 Overlap Error message indicating that the destination specified in a MO Move command lies within the range of lines specified to be moved Check typing of the MO command line specifications and compare with the pending line number Specify a different destination or a different range of lines to be moved Posted file lt filename gt Informational message displayed in response to a WR Write and Replace command indicating that the write operation is complete None required Purging file lt filename gt Informational message displayed when user entered an affirmative response to the message described above Can not recover because of incorrect data in the work file To avoid re entering recover mode purge lt filename gt Should this file be purged now _ None required Put cursor on first line when edit is complete Instructional message displayed in line mode when more than 78 characters are entered on a line during use of the Q Single Line Screen Mode command Indicates that additional characters entered on the lin
231. mand cannot be used in conjunction with the _ Repeat command This is considered a dangerous command because it has the potential to delete data that you meant to save Once the TR command is executed there are no requests from EDIT for verification of dangerous commands contained in the transfer file To safeguard against costly mistakes EDIT displays an OK prompt after entry of the TR command A y executes the command EDIT error conditions occurring during execution of the transfer terminate the transfer file and return control to the terminal If EDIT is running in batch B runstring option any error causes EDIT to abort The Comment command can be used to enter comments within an EDIT transfer file EDIT 1000 Commands 4 79 Examples Ea Opened file CMDFIL JL 4 OK y Closed file CMDFIL JL 4 Closed file EDITING JL 4 ER in command file end of edit CI gt Figure 4 43 TR Transfer Command Example 4 80 EDIT 1000 Commands U Unconditional Exchange Uses Command Default Command Syntax Remarks linespec 1 linespec 2 delete field substitute Use in line mode to replace a specific number of characters with a substitute string This command is unconditional because it deletes a specific number of characters on each line in the line range regardless of the type of character and inserts the characters from the substitute U last exchange pattern last substitute
232. mand file must be written to extract the required lines from each results file and append them to the end of the table file This multiple scheduling of EDIT is done using the CI command file illustrated in the following figure EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 31 pu cycs Gr cy csi 13324 edit cycs ti 40ler edit kal54 tr cycs1 edit kal54 tr cycs2 edit kal55 tr cycs2 edit kal58 tr cycs2 edit kal59 tr cycs2 edit kal5a tr cycs2 edit fft54 tr cycs1 edit fft54 tr cycs2 edit wal5b tr edit wal5c tr Figure 5 28 Cl Command File The summary table file created is named CYCS The first line of the CI command file purges the old version of the table file and the second line creates a new empty version of it The third line runs EDIT causing it to put a time stamp into the table file A separate EDIT command file is not needed to perform this as the required EDIT commands are short enough to include in EDIT s runstring The remaining CI command file lines run EDIT on each simulator results file Each run of EDIT reads commands from one of two EDIT command files Two versions of the EDIT command file are constructed CYCS1 and CYCS2 The CYCS1 EDIT command file is used to build table the header and to extract the first line of the summary table The CYCS2 command file serves a similar function except that it merely extracts and formats one line of the table and appends it to the summar
233. max list filedescriptor Optional line range May be absolute numbers separated by a space or a comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Note that EDIT only accepts ranges that list lines in ascending order For example EDIT does not accept a line range such as 10 5 If both range limits are omitted the LU command default is the current pending line However the number of lines displayed is determined by the maximum number of lines option if it is entered Optional maximum number of lines to be listed Limits any line range specified If both the second line specification and maximum are omitted only 20 lines are listed To default the maximum number to the range specified enter two commas after the LN command For example 1 50 LU LISTFILE This option must be specified or defaulted with two commas if a list file is to be used Optional Indicates that the list file named is to be appended to lines added to the end of the file and not overwritten Use the plus option without a filename to append to the open list file Optional list file Opens or creates a list file to store the lines specified Use either an existing filename descriptor a new filename descriptor to create a file or a device number for example to list to a printer Refer to sections in Chapters 1 and 3 on filename specification
234. mmand ER SC EDIT writes to file INPUT SC XX and does not look on any other cartridges This is the only defaulting carried out for file directories EDIT 1000 Operations 3 11 Note Text Display Formats 3 12 EDIT 1000 Operations For RTE A and RTE 6 VM EDIT cannot access files that do not conform to CI filename syntax For example if you have a FMGR filename that starts or ends with a period or contains more than one period you must rename the file with the FMGR RN command before you can access it with the EDIT program For more information on the file naming conventions refer to the appropriate manual for your RTE system When EDIT displays the pending line or text listings from the work file on your terminal the line or listing is always preceded by two blanks This convention allows room for the EDIT prompt and a single character command which aligns the new text with that displayed by EDIT Error and information messages always begin in column 1 so that the difference between an EDIT message and a line of text can be easily determined In the line mode example below the EDIT prompt and the first line of text the pending line are displayed when EDIT is first accessed for the file TESTFILE EI gt litte ester IL EDIT Use for help Opened file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 96 39 490 lines read The first line of TESTFILE EDIT displays messages that provide information on the file o
235. mmands Deleting Text To delete lines use the Kill command K To delete lines up to a line that contains the pattern D specified in the command use the Delete command If used with the V reverse option the D command can be used to delete lines that contain the pattern specified 2 42 Getting Started Tutorial Table 2 11 Task Chart for Miscellaneous EDIT Commands Miscellaneous EDIT Commands Delete Trailing Blanks Delete Tabs Run a Program Screen Copy Transfer to Command File Mark a Line Add Line Sequence Numbers Add Time amp Date Information Add Time Stamp Terminate EDIT File Input Output Reversing An Edit Kill trailing blanks for all lines Truncates lines longer than the line length limit Kill tabs insert blanks according to current tab stops Run a program and return to EDIT Copy terminal display memory to EDIT work area Reads and executes EDIT commands from a command file Mark a line with label x letter A through Z X is used in line specification to point to the line marked Add a 3 character ID and sequence numbers on columns 73 through 80 Add a 30 character field with time and date information A time stamp may be created on any line in the form lt YYMMDD HHMM gt The right angle bracket must be either the last or the next to the last non blank character on that line The information is in two digit form showing the year month and day followed by
236. mportant to understand e The EDIT Work File e How to Use EDIT to Enter Text e The Line and Screen Editing Modes e The Pending Line e EDIT File Size e File Name Specification e Dangerous Command Confirmation When the EDIT 1000 program is run EDIT reads the source file specified in the runstring and transfers a copy of the file to a work area On disk This copy is referred to as the work file or scratch file When lines are inserted or deleted the work file is updated and the line numbering is changed accordingly for each modification When editing is completed and EDIT is terminated with one of the exit commands the content of the work file is used to update write over the original source file If the file originally specified does not exist EDIT uses the edited work file to create a new source file assigning the user specified name An overview of the EDIT operation for an existing file is illustrated in Figure 1 2 Under normal termination conditions the work file is purged after it is used to update or create a file In the case of a system crash or other abnormal EDIT termination the work file is not purged and EDIT initiates a recovery operation the next time the EDIT program is run A new editing session cannot be initiated until the recovery operation is terminated by aborting or exiting EDIT If the work file is corrupted it must be purged before another EDIT session can be initiated STEP 1 EDIT reads ina copy
237. n can be used with either command to indicate the range in which they are to be executed Both commands find all occurrences of the pattern within the range specified The X and G commands produce similar results except that the X command provides a listing of the lines affected by the exchange and the G command does not This tutorial uses the X command in the sample exercises because it is easier to remember eXchange and because the listing of lines affected by the command allows you to immediately check your exchange so that you can undo UN the command if necessary The syntax for the exchange command requires that you enter the pattern to be matched and a substitute pattern The substitute pattern is required Because you may want to replace the matched character string with a null string with nothing the substitute field can be empty The match pattern and the substitute pattern are delimited with matching punctuation marks as with the Find command For example to change all occurrences of the word TEH to THE enter the command Y LS cela mae If you tried this exchange on the sample text TESTFILE use the UN Undo command to reverse the exchange As with the Find commands the Case Folding option can be set to OFF to differentiate between upper and lower case in the pattern match For example use the Set command to turn CF OFE then enter the command Sanitat y Figure 2 19 illustrates that this command ch
238. n the EDIT runstring you will be placed in the EDIT line mode You will typically use the screen mode to enter text since it speeds up the editing process and allows you to use the local terminal keys cursor arrow keys and insert and delete keys to move about the screen and insert and delete lines and characters The S Screen command is used to access EDIT s screen mode You know you are in screen mode when you see the top and bottom screen brackets illustrated in Figure 2 4 The S can be entered for an existing file as a part of the EDIT runstring CI gt edit existingfile s or it can be entered at the first EDIT prompt CI gt ect EDIT Use for help FI lt filename gt specifies file to edit EOF fi existingfile Opened file EXISTINGFILE HERMAN 4 4 36 28 lines read This is the first line of EXISTINGFILE ES To access the screen mode without specifying a filename enter the command C1 gt RECTAS 2 10 Getting Started Tutorial EDIT s screen mode treats the terminal screen as a window through which you can view and make changes to a section of the file text When you enter a command to move to another screen or to exit screen mode EDIT reads the screen and updates the work file The screen is read unless you use a command that specifies that changes made since the last screen read are to be ignored EDIT typically displays 21 lines of text at a time 10 lines above t
239. n to the RTE CI user interface and are ready to run the EDIT 1000 program Before you start make sure that the EDIT 1000 program has been loaded onto your RTE system and that it is ready to be run If it is not ask your System Manager to load it for you The procedures and examples provided in this chapter represent common means of accomplishing the various tasks illustrated However there are alternate methods to accomplish the tasks and you are encouraged to try different methods to develop your skills in using EDIT Figure 2 1 illustrates the contents of the three part tutorial RUNNING EDIT EDIT EXITING EDIT A INPUTTING AFILE Fl EDITING IN SCREEN MODE S INSERTING 8 DELETING TEXT MOVING AROUND IN SCREEN MODE MOVING BETWEEN SCREENS S AT AE AP AX EXITING amp SAVING Q U EC ER ENTERING LINE COMMANDS FROM SCREEN MODE C DISPLAYING INFORMATION H SH FINDING OUT WHERE YOU ARE N GETTING WHERE YOU WANT TO BE n DISPLAYING A PORTION OF THE FILE L W MARKING ALINE Kx SAVING FILE WITHOUT EXITING EDIT WR WC Figure 2 1 EDIT 1000 Tutorial COPYING TEXT CO UNDOING COMMANDS UN MOVING TEXT MO DELETING TEXT K MERGING FILES M FINDING A PATTERN F B EXCHANGING A PATTERN X G REPEATING A PREVIOUS COMMAND EXITING amp SAVING ER Getting Started Tutorial 2 3 Tutorial Part 1 Scre
240. nd Exchange Command Options EDIT Session Options Line Mode Editing Screen Mode Editing Error and Information Messages Recovering from Errors Batch Operation The information in this chapter will enable you to expand the EDIT runstring to include EDIT commands understand how EDIT text files are created edited saved and deleted date files when they are created or edited list EDIT 1000 output to a line printer EDIT 1000 Operations 3 1 3 2 EDIT 1000 Operations understand the EDIT 1000 command syntax and how to enter EDIT commands effectively use line specifications pattern specifications and command options in EDIT commands edit using the line mode access and exit the screen mode and edit in the screen mode using local terminal keys and control key combinations execute line commands from the screen mode recognize EDIT error and informational messages recover from user and system errors understand the basics of batch operation run a program from EDIT Working with EDIT The EDIT Runstring L n This section covers details on working with EDIT It provides information on e the EDIT runstring e naming files e creating or accessing files e closing files e deleting files e EDIT s file naming defaults e EDIT s text display format e EDIT s command syntax e line length e file size limit Chapter 1 describes how to use the simplest form of the EDIT runstring to initiate the EDIT 1000
241. nd of the command file is reached EDIT reverts back to interactive operation prompting you for the next command If there is an Abort A or Exit ER or EC command in the command file EDIT executes the command and terminates the session In the runstring method you enter all the commands required to perform your editing tasks on the line you type in at the CI prompt Obviously if you choose to use this method the number of required EDIT commands must be small enough to fit on one line You are limited to a total of 252 characters including the EDIT program name and the source file name You can use the command file method without ever using EDIT interactively This is done by using the runstring method to cause EDIT to execute a transfer TR command to your EDIT command file Note the following example CI gt Edic EEE This command causes EDIT to run in quiet operation use the source file TEST TXT and read its commands from the file CHANGE EDC EDIT provides two runstring options that are useful during batch editing The Quiet Q and Batch B options must be entered before the source filename in the runstring Both cause EDIT to suppress the listing of text and information to the screen The difference between the options is in EDIT s response to command or data errors If the Q option is used reaching the end of the command file or encountering an error causes EDIT to become interactive and prompt the user for inp
242. nd then runs Print on each list file The first step in building such a command file is to create a file containing the pertinent filenames one name per line This is done using the DL Directory List command as follows CI gt dl ftn s makelst cmd This command creates the file makelst cmd which contains the name of all the files in current directory that have the type extension FTN The S Size option causes DL to include the file size next to the filename It is used here because it places one filename per line Before issuing this command make sure the list file does not already exist If it does the DL command reports a FILE ALREADY EXISTS error The DL command also places a few extra lines in the file that should be deleted before beginning operations on the filenames An example of the output follows directory EDIT E4 name blks CNTLD_CMDS FTN 22 CNTLD_COPY_MOVE FTN 22 CNTLD_SUBS FTN 77 DO_CNTLD FTN 34 The next step in building the desired command file is to use EDIT to convert the list of filenames into proper CI commands Start by entering CI gt edit makelst cmd When EDIT starts up it reports several lines of information and prompts for the first EDIT command To delete the extra lines DL inserted at the beginning and end of the listing and to scan to see if the list includes the files expected enter the EDIT command 1 S EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 27 5 28 This places EDIT in s
243. ndow can occur if the N No Window option is specified in the search or exchange command During multiple searches or when the search for a particular pattern is unsuccessful EDIT returns to the original pending line If desired the Return RT option can be turned off using the Set command to force EDIT to remain at the end of the file EOF or at the search line range limit after an unsuccessful search In a match pattern there are two types of characters literal characters and metacharacters Literal characters represent themselves for example the character a represents the letter a Metacharacters represent patterns other than their literal value For example the at sign character represents zero or more occurrences of any character in the work file Most of the EDIT metacharacters available are used in the Regular Expressions method of pattern matching However there are three metacharacters used in standard pattern matching The anchor character Use at the beginning of a pattern string to match only those lines where the pattern occurs at the beginning of the search window usually column 1 The indefinite or wildcard character Use to match any pattern string making the shortest match possible in the line For example if the pattern is a a the string ababbabbba would contain two matches The shortest match on this line is the first aba For more on shortest possible matching refer to Chapter 5 EDIT Regular Expressi
244. ne one P lt CTRL X gt lt 222222 2222 gt This is line one lt 222222 2222 gt wr Time stamping output file Posted file TEST 41 4 1 30 fi test Closed file TEST 41 4 Opened file TEST 41 4 Time stamp found 1 line read This is line one lt 870905 0850 gt Figure 3 2 Time Stamp Example The time stamp updating option is initially on Updating can be suppressed by including an option setting command to turn time stamp update off For example CI gt Edic scm SO In this case the Time stamp found message is displayed but the update is not made EDIT does not create the time stamp If not included in your file the time stamp feature is ignored Upon file input EDIT displays a Time stamp found message if the time stamp field is found in your file The time stamp feature should not be confused with the TI command which adds a field of 30 characters with the time and date information This 30 character field is not altered except with another TI command on the same line Listing Lines If you need a printed copy of a number of lines or of the entire to a Printer file use the L command and enter the LU number Logical Unit number of a list device printer in place of a file name Note This procedure should be used with caution On a multi user system the FCL File Close List command should be used immediately after execution of the list to free up the printer If you do not use the FCL command othe
245. ne specification is not given the pending line is deleted regardless of pattern matching To delete all lines that contain a matching pattern use 1 D pattern A V To delete all lines that do not contain a matching pattern use 1 D pattern A h1 HL Header line Print ruler to indicate line edit mode columns command or command Help H or without specifying a command lists all commands 2 gives the current Edit session and source filename BE EDIT on REFCHAPTER HERMAN 4 152 53 Figure 4 21 H Help Command Examples 4 30 EDIT 1000 Commands HL Header Line Uses Use to display a header with tick marks that indicate column positions Command HL Syntax Remarks The header line lines up with the line mode listing that is two spaces are placed before the tick mark for column one If your terminal supports screen mode the EDIT command prompt and the HL command are overwritten by the header line so that it is on the line just below the last line listed The header line will display to the full screen width and is not limited to 80 characters Examples When the HL command is entered it displays the following header lines EE S PELE EEO TEI OME Es EMCEE RAISE ATENAS TITAN SEITE DEERE EL Figure 4 22 HL Header Line Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 31 HLP Header Line Pending Uses Use to extend the header line Command HLP
246. ng 00 ccc eee eee eee 5 5 Exchange Command Characters 02 ty d4 ck oie A es ees 5 5 Regular Expression A arches BM gees cm pelos EEN 5 5 Metacharacter Descriptions lt br RO Rvs oo he ow AR ae ee 5 7 The Dot Character s veses chy eo ohne cee we ee ve is exe chu ge eee 5 7 10 The Beginning Anchor Character ida ive geese eee eee ee 5 7 The End Anchor Character insistido och edge ge oo ee eee wee Se 5 9 Character Class Brackets xyz 5 0 sis ir Ses Se ey oe wee 5 10 Negated Character Class Brackets xyz 0 cs eee eee eee eee eee aes 5 11 Zero or More Match Character epoca e ia oo 5 12 One or More Match Character iced ctra ir e a oes 5 13 Pattern Repeat Angle Brackets DSi o A a 5 14 definite Character dtciasoiesr pecar eres dale are wale whe ed oa EuT ETE EEA 5 15 Alphanumeric Transition Character spero ben gaye rs 5 16 Tagged String Braces XyZ A A A gus eae wales 5 17 Tapped String RECAE A RI 5 17 Upper and Lower Case String Recall gt n lt n see eee eee eee 5 18 Break Line Character E E lee 5 18 Creating Patterns A hy leaps pu alae yy PEER OOTY ER PRE ee ES 5 20 Pattern PALIZA a is 5 20 Changing Cases ss 04a a lade Rye PERE A oe ee wl hs 5 20 Capitalizing First Letters of Words vin A aa Vaca ga 5 21 Add Text to Variable Length Lines 0 0 a eles iaa ole 5 22 Insert at a Specific Colm ai A eae aw eta ee 5 22 Move Columns of Data sss jad tie eae ad ee a AS 5 23 Make All Lines a Minimum
247. ngs and metacharacters to define matched strings Metacharacters are a set of characters used to specify patterns They can be turned ON using the SE RE on Set Regular Expressions ON command The metacharacters are Matches any character except the end of a line Anchors search to beginning of the window or line End of the line or window whichever is shorter A class of characters find any one of these characters Negated class find all but these characters Match zero or more occurrences of the previous pattern Match one or more occurrences of the previous pattern Match exactly n occurrences of the previous pattern xyz amp n Pattern Specification Shortcuts Match zero or more characters shorthand for Delimiter used between alphanumerics and other characters Indicates a tagged field recalled by amp n in the substitute string Recalls the n th tagged field used only in the substitute string 1 lt n lt 9 amp by itself is the substitute field Same as amp n but shift substitute string to uppercase Same as amp n but shift substitute string to lowercase Break line at position of metacharacter A dash between alphanumerics in a character class specifies a range such as 0 9 A Z or A Z0 9 Character classes may also include escaped metacharacters such as which is the class containing or Matches containing or Y extend to the longest possible match EDIT normall
248. nipulation commands and to gather data from several different files EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 1 Using Regular Expressions Introduction Regular Expressions is a pattern specification method for search to Regular and exchange commands that uses regular character strings and metacharacters to define the patterns to be matched Expressions Metacharacters are a set of non alphanumeric characters used to develop generalized patterns that match a wider variety of items than is possible with mere literal pattern matching There are two types of pattern matching available Regular Expressions OFF matching and Regular Expressions ON matching Both types are available for use with the EDIT 1000 commands B and F Find G and X Exchange and Y Exchange and Search Regular Expressions OFF matching satisfies the need for a fast simple system of pattern matching Regular Expressions ON matching provides a complicated but more powerful method of pattern matching When the Regular Expressions option is set to OFF EDIT 1000 allows the use of literal pattern strings described in more detail following and patterns that incorporate the caret and wildcard metacharacters When Regular Expressions are enabled the option is set to ON using the Set command EDIT matches literal pattern strings as well as pattern strings consisting of one or more of the 15 metacharacters listed in Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 Table 5 1 Metacharacters fo
249. ns RE option 3 26 4 4 4 13 Remove R option 3 24 repeat _ command 4 92 4 98 repeating command string 4 98 replace pending line with text See R command replacing a file 4 16 a file without exiting EDIT 4 87 text 3 33 See also pattern exchange Return RT option 3 26 4 4 Reverse V option 3 24 reverse match B 3 reversing commands 2 29 reviewing commands entered 2 35 RT option 3 26 RTE operating system 2 2 3 12 and EDIT regular expressions 5 27 error information messages A 14 file system errors 3 45 RTE 6 VM 1 1 RTE A 1 1 user interface 2 7 2 17 2 19 2 27 3 11 RTE A Hello program 1 4 RU command 3 11 3 50 4 60 running a program 4 60 runstring definition 1 2 1 6 B 3 description 3 3 file recovery 3 47 Index 6 including editing commands in 3 49 including S command 1 11 2 10 options 3 3 screen command in 3 34 variations 2 7 S S command 1 11 2 10 2 19 2 27 3 34 4 61 saving a file 2 17 2 24 3 5 and exiting EDIT 2 17 file after abnormal abort 3 46 3 47 line marks 2 24 screen edits 2 15 3 37 3 42 without exiting EDIT 2 24 SC command 4 68 scratch directory file 3 47 scratch file definition 1 8 B 3 system 3 47 screen accessing next 2 15 3 38 4 62 accessing previous 2 15 3 38 4 62 4 63 advance 2 15 brackets 2 11 2 21 3 34 4 66 copy 4 68 display 2 11 2 16 3 35 error message 2 12 extended 3 35 line limit show 3 35 line overlap 2 1
250. nsed Screen width set Uses the SE command to set screen width to n n must be greater than 1 and less than 256 If set is 0 EDIT and set the sensed value on the next command stack or screen mode command EDIT 1000 Commands 4 71 SH Show Options Uses Command Syntax lt option gt FM MA SW UN Remarks Examples 4 72 EDIT 1000 Commands Use in line mode to view various EDIT options and defaults SH lt option gt Enter option to be displayed Possible options that can be displayed are illustrated in the example following To view all possible options enter SH or SH ALL Refer to example following Other EDIT settings that can be viewed using the SH command include Shows whether any changes have been made Set by a work file modification and turned off by WC WR Write Create and Write Replace or FI File Input commands Displays the current text marks and their corresponding line numbers Show Width Shows the current screen width This will be zero until either command stack or a screen mode command is entered at which time the terminal is sensed Shows the Undo List maintained by EDIT This list is used when the UN Undo command is executed and it is updated for each text modification For more information on EDIT options and defaults refer to the section on the SE Set Option command and the section on EDIT 1000 options in Chapter 3 Figure 4 38 illustrates the display resulting from
251. number of commands to display Default is 20 commands Remarks Commands are listed in sequence with the cursor positioned at the last blank line The cursor can be moved to any command in the stack with the cursor arrow keys The command can then be re executed with a carriage return or edited and then executed Enter carriage return immediately after display of the stack to terminate the command and return to the EDIT prompt Only the first 79 characters of a command line are placed in the command stack The use of command separators does not influence what is saved in the command stack The last 20 command lines entered including illegal commands are saved The control character commands entered in screen mode are not recorded in the command stack If a command matches one already in the stack the old command is removed from the stack The command stack only works with the terminal and serial driver combination that support screen mode If the terminal does not support screen mode use of the command merely advances the pending line For additional information of command stack features see the RTE A User s Manual or the RTE 6 VM CI User s Manual Examples 4 96 Commands se df of 1 f sect 100 sect 1 f sect F 1 f Sequence N 421 429 A B co Figure 4 55 Command Stack Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands lt space gt Append a Line Uses Used in line mode
252. o alpha characters as follows F333AM U698IG N723MB S979ML T777JJ U612JD F987WE WNR T O a RR List the commands you would use to add line numbers to a BASIC program For a file that includes text of telephone numbers and names that start in column 15 and do not extend beyond column 50 as listed following develop an exchange command with a pattern that switches the columns to list names in the first column and phone numbers in the second column The phone numbers should line up after the switch Hint first set your horizontal search window 703 525 8911 Gertrude Magillicutty 609 892 4356 Cliff Hanson 807 567 7333 Amanda Swampbreath 605 899 1212 Remark Able EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 25 Answers One version of the command that searches for part numbers similar to those in the example follows 1 F 0 9 A Z 0 9 lt 3 gt A Z A 2 For this exercise you would first use the Sequence Number command to place numbers in columns 73 through 75 in the example they are shifted left to fit within the right margin of the page Then set Regular Expressions ON SE RE on and enter the following command 1 X 1 amp 2 amp 1 You would then probably want to use the Kill Blanks BK command to delete all trailing blanks There are many commands that accomplish the task described in exercise 3 Two possible commands are listed below SEREON SEWC 50 1 U Q
253. o edit Informational message displayed when the EDIT runstring is used without specifying a filename to be edited Use FI File Input command to access an existing file for editing or enter text for a new file that is created by using the EC Exit and Create or WC Write and Create command after editing is complete File is write protected Error message displayed when user attempts to open a write protected file EDIT can read the file but will not allow you to write over the file using an ER Exit and Replace or WR Write and Replace command Check typing specify a different file or for File Manager files access by specifying the correct security code for the file Error and Information Messages A 5 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action If your terminal has them disable straps d g and enable straps I T closed lower case is disable Informational message indicating that your terminal is not strapped correctly for the EDIT 1000 program and that EDIT was unable to programmatically re strap the terminal See the System Manager to have the terminal manually re strapped Illegal file type on file lt filename gt Type lt 1 2 or 6 gt files are illegal Error message displayed when user attempts to edit a file with a file type of 1 2 or 6 Only file types 3 4 5 7 and above can be edited using EDIT 1000 The
254. o set automatic time stamp updating on or off initially on To set BELL with prompt on off initially off 2 40 Getting Started Tutorial Commands that may corrupt your file if executed inadvertently prompt you for confirmation If the OK prompt is displayed only a y es answer executes the command Except for the Abort A and Transfer TR commands even if you enter y by mistake you can still recover by entering the Undo UN command The OK prompt can be suppressed by concluding the command string with a slash technically the current EDIT prompt character The following chart summarizes the commands that require confirmation Table 2 7 Task Chart for Commands Requiring Confirmation for Execution Commands Requiring Confirmation for Execution Command Mnemonic Description Confirmation prompt issued only if file has been modified Abort and save AS Confirmation prompt is always issued scratch file Delete until Default range is delete only the pending line regardless of match pattern specified Confirmation prompt always issued Kill lines confirmation prompt issued if more than one line is to be deleted Confirmation is not required if a new list file is created or an existing file is appended K Transfer input TR Confirmation prompt is always issued While executing the TR command file no confirmation prompts are displayed Unconditional U Confirmation prompt is not issued if only one line is to be replace
255. o several global changes covered in the next portion of the tutorial to change for example a file descriptor used throughout your file If the change is not done correctly you want to be able to abort the file so that the changes are ignored by EDIT But what about the 200 lines of text you just entered If you aborted EDIT they would be ignored too The solution to this problem requires that you save the file before executing the global changes Using an EC Exit and Create or an ER Exit and Replace would exit the editing session You can speed up the process by using either the WC or WR command As with the EC command EDIT requires a filename when creating a file using the WC command After executing a WC or WR command continue editing the same file or use the FI File Input command to close the current file and access a different 2 24 Getting Started Tutorial file The FI command is described in Part 1 of this tutorial Suppose you are editing the file TESTFILE and want to save it under a different filename You would then like to check the newly created file to ensure that it was copied correctly After using U to escape the screen mode your entries and the system response would look like this Current pending line when U was executed wc newtestfile Created file NEWTESTFILE HERMAN 4 18 Closed file NEWTESTFILE HERMAN 4 18 Current pending line fi newtestfile Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 38 Opened fi
256. o tabs are set EDIT defaults tab stops to the TA tab setting Note that the terminal defaults to no tab stops To enter a tab stop during text entry use the current tab character The default tab character is the TAB key on the terminal or CTRL I It may be changed to another character with the SE TC Set Tab Character command To view the current default for the tab character use the SH TC Show Tab Character command The tab column settings for the special tab commands can be viewed online by entering T The special tab column settings follow Assembler ASMB tab settings in columns 7 21 and every column after 21 FORTRAN FTN tab settings in column 7 every 4 columns until the tenth stop and every column after the tenth stop Macro tab settings in columns 10 26 40 44 48 and every column after column 48 Pascal tab settings which are every 3 columns until the tenth stop and every column after the tenth stop starting in column 4 HP UX tab settings in every eighth column starting in column 9 up to the full screen width EDIT 1000 Commands 4 75 TL Use the TL command to set the terminal tab stops so that they line up with EDIT s line mode tab stops Remember that text displayed in line mode is shifted two characters to the right of column one TS Use the TS command to set the terminal tab stops so that they line up with EDIT s screen mode tab stops The terminal s internally set tab stops and
257. one line mode command e Use the H or Help command to access EDIT s online reference and the SH Show command to display the current settings for EDIT 1000 session options Getting Started Tutorial 2 1 Prerequisites 2 2 Getting Started Tutorial e Use the N Line Number command to find out where you are and the n Specific Line Number to move to a specific line e Use the L List and W List Window commands to display a portion of a file e Use the Kx Mark Line command to mark a line or block of lines e Save or create a file before making major changes using the WR Write and Replace or WC Write and Create commands e Copy text using the CO Copy command move text using the MO Move command delete text using the K Kill command and find and replace text using the search F B and exchange X G commands e Reverse EDIT commands using the UN undo command e Merge all or a portion of one file into another using the M Merge command e Repeat a previously executed command without retyping by using the command stack review feature This tutorial assumes that you have read Chapter 1 EDIT 1000 Basics and that you know how to use the editing keys on your terminal cursor arrows insert and delete keys You can work through the tutorial without reading Chapter 1 but your understanding of the capabilities of EDIT 1000 may not be as complete Finally this tutorial assumes that you are logged o
258. one required Command not executed Informational message displayed when a non affirmative response is entered in response to the OK prompt described above None required A 2 Error and Information Messages Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Commands Header for the list of commands displayed in response to the command stack review command To re execute a command listed in the command stack position the cursor on the desired command and press the carriage return User may also edit any command in the stack and execute in the same way Created file lt filename gt Informational message displayed after user enters an FI File Input L List EC Exit and Create WC Write and Create M Merge or TR Transfer command to create a file Filename is listed at the position of lt filename gt None required Disk error Error message displayed in response to a disk hardware failure Attempt an EC Exit and Create command to exit EDIT Ask your System Manager to run a diagnostic test on your hardware to determine the nature of the problem EDIT on lt filename gt Informational message displayed in response to the command Provides the current user s version of the EDIT program for example EDI53 and the file being edited None required EDIT on lt filename gt closed
259. ons The default escape character used before a special character to make the character represent itself rather than its special character meaning For example would represent the literal at sign All patterns used in a command must be offset by a delimiter The delimiter used to identify the start and stop of a pattern can be any punctuation character except commas or spaces The first non comma non space character encountered in a pattern sets the value for the pattern lt delimiter gt All pattern delimiters used in a command must match In this manual the slash character is used as the pattern lt delimiter gt The EDIT Case Folding CF option is normally set to ON during an editing session To differentiate between upper and lowercase letters in a match pattern the CF option must be set to OFF The search commands F and B are used to find one or more lines that contain the pattern specified The only difference between the commands is that the start line default for the B command search is line one and the start line default for the F command is the current pending line The pattern syntax for a search F or B command is lt delimiter gt lt match pattern gt lt delimiter gt Note that the second delimiter is optional for a search command if there are no additional options to be added after the match pattern If used with the All A option the F and B commands find and produce a listing of all occurrences of t
260. or Help command Check typing Use to view the help available If online help is not available for the command or option entered consult the Manual No marks Informational message displayed in response to the SH MA Show Marks command Indicates that there are no lines in the file that have been marked using the CTRL and K or Kx Mark Line command None required No space in scratch file Error message displayed if user attempts to modify a file after receiving the Out of disk work space message Use an ER Exit and Replace or A Abort command to exit EDIT then proceed to obtain additional disk space as suggested under the Out of disk work space message above Error and Information Messages A 7 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action No such file lt filename gt An ER or the first WR will create it Message displayed when a non existing file is specified in the EDIT runstring The filename specified is listed at the position of lt filename gt If file is to be created proceed to enter text and use the ER Exit and Replace command without a filename to terminate the session Otherwise check typing of filename entered non HP26XX terminal screen mode unavailable Error informational message displayed in response to the S Screen Mode command Indicates that your term
261. or a write command ER or WR is used on a file that is write protected Check typing to ensure that the correct file was specified log on as the owner of the file or see the System Manager to investigate possible access to the file An EC Exit and Create command can be used to create an unprotected copy of the file ILLEGAL FILE POSITION Error message displayed when EDIT is reading in a file and detects that the record structure of the file is corrupted This is usually the result of an abnormal program termination or a system error Examine file to determine what information has been lost An ER Exit and Replace command updates the file to have consistent record structure saving only the uncorrupted data currently in EDIT s work file ILLEGAL LU Error message indicating that device number for example tape drive printer etc specified is not accessible or capable of performing the specified function or does not exist Check typing ILLEGAL NAME Error message indicating that filename specified contains illegal characters for example leading digits or non printing characters such as control characters Correct filename used Error and Information Messages A 15 Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Message Cause Action INCORRECT PASSWORD Error message displayed when the password specified for a
262. or is placed at the last point in the list Note that systems without the new serial drivers will echo characters due to an incompatibility in the MUX driver To enter a command on these systems type CTRL C followed by a carriage return edit will open a line on the screen and display the following prompt CTRL D mode gt At this point you should enter a CTRL D mode command The prompt and the command will be executed and erased when you press carriage return To erase the last point in the CTRL D list position the cursor to the display point and enter another CTRL D This will erase the inverse video mark and the point for the list To remove all points enter the CTRL D command Q CTRL D mode commands are defined below They are all single character commands sometimes followed by options The characters inside the angle brackets are options and are defined later in the list A lt BEPN gt Arrow Draw a path see the P command for path definition through the defined points and put an arrow head at the end of the path Arrow heads may not display correctly on most terminals however LaserJets with the line drawing character set will display them B lt BEPN gt Box C Copy E Erase path L lt BEP N gt Lines M Move P lt B EP N gt Path Q Quit R Re mark U Undo Options N No read Draw a closed polygon through the defined points The last point is saved as a locator point and then removed from th
263. or the file TESTFILE CI gt edit testfil EDIT Use for help Opened file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 96 39 490 lines read The first line of TESTFILE If an error is made when entering a command you can erase it by using the backspace key prior to executing the command with a carriage return You can also reverse many of the EDIT commands after execution by using the Undo UN command For more on Line Mode Editing refer to Chapter 3 The EDIT screen mode is accessed by entering the Screen S command from the EDIT prompt or by including the S command in the EDIT runstring In the screen mode EDIT treats the terminal screen as a window through which you can view several lines of text at a time Editing is carried out inside this window and when commanded to do so EDIT reads your screen and places the new edits into the work file The local terminal keys cursor arrow keys insert keys and delete keys and control key combinations CTRL and an alpha key followed by a carriage return are used for the editing process Many of the control key combinations serve a dual purpose They perform an action and can be entered once or twice before the carriage return to either save or ignore new edits to the screen For example the CTRL E carriage return command advances the screen display to the next 20 or so lines of text If entered as CTRL F followed by the carriage return the original screen is read and
264. ores any changes made to the file you accessed If editing a new file the A command exits EDIT without creating the file The A command is considered a dangerous command because it has the potential to delete data that you may want to save For this reason EDIT displays an OK prompt that requires you to confirm the abort by typing in yes or ay EDIT displays the OK prompt only if changes have been made to the work file Enter the Abort command A at the EDIT prompt Because you did not make changes to your file EDIT will not prompt you for con firmation of the abort and the editing session will be terminated with out creating the file TESTFILE You will create it under the section on Inserting and Deleting Text later in Part 1 of the tutorial The following example illustrates the use of the abort command from a new file to which no changes were made CI gt edit new EDIT Use for help No such file NEW An ER or the first WR will create it a EDIT aborted by user end of edit CI gt The following example illustrates the use of the abort command from an existing file to which no changes were made CI gt REC sa EDIT Use for help Opened file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 28 lines read This is line one of the file FIRST a EDIT aborted by user Closed file FIRST HERMAN 4 4 36 end of edit CI gt Inputting a File FI The example which follows illustrates the system response when th
265. ource file is to be used by the program being run it must first be restored to the disk file with the WR command and closed with the FCS command It then can be used with another program including another version of EDIT The filename must be specified for future WR or ER commands after FCS closed the file The runstring is case folded and blanks are replaced with commas Figure 4 34 illustrates the use of the RU command to run another version of the EDIT program from EDIT The A Abort command is then used to terminate the second copy of EDIT The RU command is then used to run a copy of CI from EDIT and the CI EX Exit command is used to terminate CI ED53A Use for help end of edit FI lt filename gt specifies file to edit EOF a ED53A aborted by user Resume EDIT on REFCHAPTER HERMAN 4 111 41 UA Using stack file CI STK CI gt ex Finished Resume EDIT on REFCHAPTER HERMAN 4 111 41 Figure 4 34 RU Run Program Command Examples 4 60 EDIT 1000 Commands S Screen Mode Edit Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 Screen Mode Commands Use to edit file in the screen mode Command displays several lines of text at a time and then allows the use of terminal edit keys Screens displayed are bracketed by a beginning line and an ending line that provide the beginning and ending line numbers of the portion of the file displayed See ex
266. pened and the number of lines in the file It then prints the pending line offset by two spaces followed by the prompt character If an invalid command is entered at this point an error indication is displayed starting in column 1 An error message may also be displayed as follows Gr gt dit testfil EDIT Use for help Opened file TESTFILE H 490 lines read The first line of TESTFILE 1142 1 Eloicycale 2 1 f bicycle S ERMAN 4 96 39 Start gt stop In this example a Find F command was entered to locate the word bicycle The range of lines that the command was to affect line 2 to line 1 was illegal because the start of the range line 2 was larger than the end of the range line 1 EDIT repeats the EDIT Command Syntax Note Line Length invalid command prints a question mark and a caret to indicate the location of the error and displays an error message Start gt stop starting in column 1 Error messages are covered in more detail later in this chapter To take full advantage of EDIT s capabilities you must understand its command syntax EDIT 1000 commands have the following basic form lt line specification gt lt command gt lt parameters gt EDIT read commands from left to right separating the individual units of the command line specifications command mnemonic and parameters for translating Almost all EDIT commands begin with an option
267. ple of Find F Command with Case Folding OFF After listing all matched lines EDIT indicates that it has reached the end of the file or prints the word LIMIT to indicate that it reached the end of the specified line range and indicates the number of lines that contain one or more matches 2 32 Getting Started Tutorial ae Use the same search exercises as those listed in Figure 2 16 to find E occurrences of the word EDIT in TESTFILE Then do the exer cise again with the Case Folding option set to ON to see the dif ference in the results it Search Metacharacters The previous search exercises are examples of literal pattern matching That is the character string to be found is typed in exactly as it occurs in the text EDIT provides two special characters or metacharacters that can be used to match a more generalized pattern The character or wildcard character is used in patterns to indicate zero or more occurrences of any character For example to find all lines that contain the letter E followed by the letter X regardless of the characters in between enter the command 1 etx a Figure 2 17 illustrates the lines matched in the TESTFILE sample text by this command 00006 edited can be source language programs or text material 00011 Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and 00012 modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing 00019 window through which the user can view a section
268. program The simplest form of the EDIT runstring consists merely of the word EDIT The runstring can be expanded to include the specific file to be edited It can be further expanded to include runstring options and EDIT commands Runstring options start with a minus sign and are entered after the EDIT command and before the filename EDIT commands follow the filename and are separated from the filename by a space or a comma and from each other by command separators default The following options can be entered before the filename in the EDIT runstring The Batch option is used to run EDIT without any user interaction for example to run EDIT from a command file If an error occurs for example if a file cannot be merged or the command file does not end with an exit command EDIT will abort The Batch option turns on the quiet option Set line length n is an integer number of characters that becomes the maximum line length Lines longer than the maximum line length default 256 characters will be truncated without warning when the file is read in by EDIT EDIT 1000 Operations 3 3 S directory More on the EDIT Runstring 3 4 EDIT 1000 Operations The Quiet option is used to indicate that nothing should be listed to the terminal during the EDIT operation If an error occurs for example if a file is missing the quiet operation is turned off This option can also be turned off by using the Set Quiet Off
269. ption and do not re enter the list file name Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK dangerous command confirmation prompt displayed when a file descriptor is entered to list lines to another file If the use of this command deletes more than one line of your work file it is considered a dangerous command If a list file is opened this is also considered dangerous because it may overwrite data when lines are listed to an existing file Because of this EDIT displays the OK prompt when an existing file is specified in the command string The prompt is not displayed when the list file specified is to be created For more information on the prompt and how to suppress it refer to the section on Dangerous Command Confirmation in Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Operations EDIT 1000 Commands 4 35 Examples 4 36 EDIT 1000 Commands The K and L commands share the list file Once a list file has been opened or created it can be closed using the FCL command If the list file is connected to a device such as the printer be sure to close it as soon as the list operation has completed This unlocks the device for use by other users on the system If the FCL command is not used EDIT automatically closes the list file when user exits the program To view or access the list file without leaving the editor be sure to use FCL to close the list file To append more lines to the list file currently open enter the option w
270. py Move Undo and List The chapter concludes with several quick reference task charts of EDIT commands CHAPTER 3 EDIT 1000 OPERATIONS Chapter 3 provides detailed information on the operation of the EDIT 1000 program including command syntax line range specification pattern specification for search and exchange commands EDIT session options error recovery batch operation and error and information messages CHAPTER 4 EDIT 1000 COMMANDS Chapter 4 is designed as a reference chapter It contains an alphabetical listing of all the EDIT commands CHAPTER 5 EDIT REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Chapter 5 presents instructions on using EDIT s Regular Expressions option to match pattern strings in text files and to accomplish file tasks in conjunction with the RTE user interface APPENDICES The Appendices for the EDIT 1000 Manual provide a listing of error and information messages a glossary instructions on loading the EDIT 1000 program and information on using EDIT in a multipoint environment Table of Contents Chapter 1 EDIT 1000 Basics Titrod ttion cdt cn daa wis POG OER a ARE A The hs AAA EDITA000 D sctiption kere mest ninenin ea quest tte ete deere Re ore ae a eee BR Gon A PDT OVO Peatures vs Ae el a ieee puree e ay beta t rene O bute ee Manual Conventions A A keh oe cee a PRA hE eke et wate Bene eae EDIT 1000 Information Sources 20 Soe s Ao ken Ee RUE Shee Ai RO Oniine Onick Relerente gi cy cata ee tak Sen
271. r Classes Alphanumeric and special characters to be included in a character class are enclosed in left and right square brackets This indicates that EDIT is to match any of the characters included between the brackets When a character class is included in a pattern a text character occurring in the corresponding position matches any one of the characters from the bracketed class For example the command F x y matches the boxed items in the following sample text XZY XaY XY Figure 5 7 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x y 5 10 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Negated Character Class Brackets xyz The command directed EDIT to match the letter X followed by either a dot plus or minus character and then the letter Y A match is located on the first and second line however the third line does not match because the Z and a do not match any of the characters in the character class The last line does not match because there is no character between the X and Y Within the brackets of a character class there are only three characters that have special meaning They are the caret the minus sign and the closing square bracket The caret has special meaning only if it is the first character after the left bracket This meaning is described in the following section on Negated Character Class The minus sign specifies a range of characters if it is between digits or the same case
272. r Standard Pattern Matching The anchor character Use at the beginning of a pattern string to match only those lines where the pattern occurs at the beginning of the line The indefinite or wildcard character Use to match any pattern string mak ing the shortest match possible in the line 5 2 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Table 5 2 Metacharacters for Regular Expressions ON Mode The single character wildcard Use to match any character except the end of a line The beginning anchor Use to anchor search to the beginning of the line or search window The end anchor Use to anchor search to the end of the line or window whichever is shorter Square brackets Defines a class of characters Use to find any of the en closed characters Square brackets and caret Negates a class of characters Use to find all but the enclosed characters Use to match zero or more occurrences of preceding pattern Use to match one or more occurrences of the preceding pattern Angle brackets Use to match a specific number n of occurrences of the preceding pattern The indefinite or wildcard character Use to match zero or more occur rences of any character short for The alphanumeric transition character Use to delimit a pattern string so that it matches only that string in the file as offset by spaces or punctuation and not the string within other alphanumeric strings Example use and to find the word and but not band
273. r has the same effect as entering the character or character class twice followed by a asterisk However the plus is easier to type The angle brackets lt n gt are used to match a specific number of occurrences of a preceding character or character class For example the command 1 F lt 4 gt would match the boxed items in the following text Figure 5 12 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F lt 4 gt The pattern specifies to match four occurrences of any character The first and second lines do not match because there are not enough characters The third and fourth lines match because there are at least four characters to match on each line The command 1 F abc lt 3 gt a matches the boxed items in the following text abn abn abn Figure 5 13 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 F abc lt 3 gt a In the preceding example the first and third lines match because they contain three occurrences of the characters specified in the Character class The second line does not match because there are blanks between the characters specified in the character class No blanks are specified in the class The fourth line does not match because it contains only one character and the pattern specified three occurrences The fifth line matches the pattern since it 5 14 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Indefinite Character contains three occurrences of the characters specified one right after th
274. r pattern and substitute Use any matching punctuation marks with the exception of commas and spaces All three delimiters must be used when any option or OK prompt suppression is used If no options are used the last delimiter may be omitted The default pattern and substitute for exchange commands may be used by omitting the pattern delimiters and substitute To view the current pattern and substitute defaults use the SH command for any of the exchange commands G U X and Y To default the pattern and substitute but specify an option enter Y lt option gt Pattern to be located See section on pattern specifications in Chapter 3 If Regular Expressions is set to ON the metacharacters can be used for unique pattern matches refer to Chapter 5 for more on Regular Expressions If a null pattern is entered the Find default pattern is used Pattern to replace the search pattern specified first in the command string Substitute pattern can be longer or shorter than the search pattern EDIT inserts or deletes characters as necessary to fill the line Optional no window flag Enter the N option to disregard the horizontal window columns setting and allow a match anywhere on a line To see setting for window columns use SH WC command Q Optional quiet flag Enter the Q option to suppress listing of the matched lines R Optional remove flag Use the R option to remove a null blank line after the exchange S Optional sin
275. r position on the right Paying attention to these observations will help greatly In the multipoint environment screen mode and the command stack features are not available The slash moves EDIT to the next line All of the other EDIT commands may be used in a multipoint environment The Q and O commands are used for character edits in a multipoint environment Both commands are used to edit the pending line The only difference between them is that the O command immediately sends a copy of the pending line to the destination work area while the Q command does not Although only the Q command is discussed throughout the rest of this section the discussion applies to the O command as well EDIT 1000 in a Multipoint Environment D 1 D 2 When the Q command is entered the pending line is displayed along with the delimiter GS to the left of the line The delimiter is not part of the text string and must be preserved to assure proper operation EDIT will position the cursor underneath the first character of the line You may now edit the line using any of the following procedures To retain the pending line as it is immediately hit the ENTER key For example Q ABCDEFGHIJKL Cursor displayed under first character in line Press the ENTER key and line is retained as is P ABCDEFGHIJKL Line displayed remains the same To truncate characters from the end of a line position the cursor immediately after the
276. r system users will be unable to use the printer because it is locked to your EDIT session EDIT 1000 Operations 3 9 Closing Files 3 10 EDIT 1000 Operations If you want a record of the lines deleted with the K command use the K command in the same manner as with the L command In the example below 6 refers to the LU of the printer 1 specifies the entire file 200 restricts the listing to a maximum of 200 lines Ai S 5 200 The following examples illustrate how to list lines 1 to 150 to the printer and how to produce a listing of lines deleted Ail 150 top Ai 8 k Suppose you wish to print the text file on a line printer while you continue to edit Use the L List command as follows Ai amp ip 6 In the command above the line specification 1 indicates the entire file from line 1 to the end The List command requires you to enter the maximum number of lines to list The double commas are entered to default the maximum to the line specification entered in this case the number of lines contained in the entire file The 6 is the printer designation If you were listing the file or a portion of it to another file instead of printing it you would replace the printer number with a filename EDIT s source file is closed when the EDIT session is terminated using any of the exit commands EC Exit and Create ER Exit and Replace or A Abort or when the FI File Input command is used to access another file The
277. reset or the EDIT session is terminated If the search window is not reset to the default and the search is unsuccessful EDIT displays the search window setting after all subsequent searches exchanges that do not have any matches This serves as a reminder in case you have forgotten to reset to the default If it is not reset the search is successful and it used the All A option to locate all occurrences the search window setting is displayed If the search is successful but the A option is not used the window setting is not shown The caret metacharacter has the same meaning whether the Regular Expressions option is set to ON or OFF The caret and the indefinite character are the only metacharacters that can be used for both Regular Expressions ON and OFF pattern definition The dollar sign metacharacter is used with the Regular Expressions option set to ON at the end of a pattern to anchor the match to the end of the line A dollar sign in any position other than at the end of the pattern is a literal dollar sign and matches a dollar sign in the text of the file For example the command F xyzzy would match the boxed item in the following text abcd xyzzy defg qwert Xyzzy asdf hgijkl vbnm xyzy XyZZy rtyu abxyzzycd abcd dcba Figure 5 5 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy There is only one match in the text sample because there is is only one line that contains a match to the pattern that oc
278. rial 2 39 Table 2 6 Task Chart for Option Setting Commands Setting EDIT Session Options Task Command To set anchor character initially To set escape character initially To set indefinite character initially To set prompt character initially To set command separator character initially To set tab character initially TAB key or CTRL I To specify tab columns for ASMB 7 and 21 To specify tab columns for FTN 7 and every 4 columns To specify tab columns for Macro programs 10 26 40 44 48 To specify tab columns for Pascal every 3 columns To specify tab columns for HP UX every 8 columns To set tab stops local to terminal as defined by T for screen mode To offset tab stops 2 columns for line mode edits To set window columns initially 1 and 256 To set default screen size initially 10 lines above and 10 lines below pending line with a 2 line screen to screen overlap To set maximum screen mode size default depends on terminal type To set vertical window size initially 10 lines above and 10 lines below pending line 21 lines total To set line length initially at the maximum of 256 To set prompt for dangerous commands on or off initially on To set case folding on or off initially on To set regular expressions on or off initially off To set screen mode display functions on or off initially on To set no match return to pending line on or to lower range limit off initially on T
279. riate control key combination commands Deletion Example for EDIT P 1 1 1 lt ctr1 C gt xxx Deletion Example EDIT This is a replacement exampl P lt ctrl C gt xxxxxxxxxx lt ctrl R gt R Replacement exampl This is anacter example P lt ctrl S gt insert char This is an insert character example This illustrates how to truncate lines B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 lt ctr1 T gt This illustrates how to truncate lines An extend line example P lt ctrl X gt is illustrated below An extend line example is illustrated below A line break example P lt ctrl B gt lt ctrl B gt break example 3 sh 00001 A 00002 line 00003 break example EDIT 1000 Operations 3 33 Screen Mode Editing The EDIT screen mode is accessed by entering the Screen S command from the EDIT prompt or by including the S command in the EDIT runstring The screen mode displays several lines of text at a time and enables local terminal key edits Screens displayed are bracketed by a beginning line and an ending line that provide the beginning and ending line numbers of the portion of the file being displayed The beginning screen bracket line displays the command used to exit the screen mode and the ending line displays the file descriptor of the file being edited If the file descriptor is too long to display in its entirety EDIT displays a port
280. ring an editing process this practice ensures that you will have sole access to the work file and will be present to monitor the recovery operation The following error informational messages may be displayed during the recovery operation Disk read error on first recover read Frame size words do not match in recover file Recover frame size words not correct for this Edit Both head and tail missing in recover file Any of the above messages indicate that the work file is corrupted Examine the work file carefully to determine if any portion of the file can be salvaged Batch Operation Q and B Runstring Options EDIT Session Status EDIT can be run by batch or interactively When running EDIT several methods are available to accomplish the task without user interaction One means is to create a file consisting of EDIT commands This command file is then transferred to from an editing session or included in the EDIT program runstring A second method involves including editing commands in the EDIT program runstring EDIT also provides batch and quiet options that control the amount of information displayed on your screen and EDIT s action when an error is encountered In the command file method you instruct EDIT to read its commands from a prepared file instead of typing them into your terminal This is done by using EDIT s Transfer TR command This transfer can be entered during an EDIT session When the e
281. rovides a means of specifying alternates and developing generalized patterns For example X Y which matches X Y or X Y To use the regular expressions EDIT session option use the Set command to turn the option ON reverse match A search in which a match occurs only if the specified pattern is not found within a line runstring Usually a run program command with all the permissible command parameters For example EDIT file 120 S scratch file Term often used to refer to the work file or temporary work area on disk where EDIT operates from during the editing session This area contains the text read into memory screen mode An editing mode in which a number of lines of text is displayed to allow local editing using the editing keys available on the terminal keyboard source file An ASCII file opened and read by EDIT string A group of ASCII characters substitute A replacement pattern when a match occurs during an exchange command execution vertical window The number of lines above and below the pending line to be displayed with the vertical window W command window Usually means the search window which confines the search to within two columns defined by the horizontal window settings See also Vertical Window Glossary B 3 Loading EDIT 1000 The EDIT program must be loaded online EDIT should be loaded by the system manager or a person appointed by the manager The following components are required
282. rs are limited in length to 256 characters If the L n run string option is used to increase EDIT s line length beyond the default 256 characters there are some limitations on the use of Regular Expressions Regular Expressions are limited to 256 characters both when specifying the Regular Expression and when scanning or substituting text During specification if the Regular Expression is longer than 256 characters or if its interal form exceeds the internal buffer size EDIT will report an error with its normal prompt The up arrow will point at the end of the Regular Expression During substitution if the text being manipulated exceeds 256 characters EDIT will truncate the text without warning EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 5 It is possible for Regular Expressions to operate on a subset of long lines without truncation by using the set window columns SE WC command The limitation is that the width of the window column must be less than 256 characters The window column can start at any position on the line characters before or after the window column are not scanned and remain unchanged during Regular Expression substitution For example to remove leading digits on long lines provided there are no more than 256 leading digits use SE RE ON SE WC 1 256 1 X 0 9 5 6 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Metacharacter Descriptions A description and examples of each of the metacharacters follows
283. rses the SC command Everything is copied including the SC command EDIT stops when 24 or more null blank lines are encountered Any text after the 24th null line is not copied On some terminals the screen memory may be edited prior to executing the SC command by using the SCROLL and DELETE LINE keys The SC command can be used in a command file to be accessed via the Transfer TR command This results in a screen copy in the output file even if the Quiet option Q is used with the TR command Examples Figure 4 36 illustrates the result of the use of the screen copy after a command stack command Commands se df of 740 s A B mo 705 fi lemon s wr fi refchapter 705 s tA 2B Go CD EOS E F co EOF sc Figure 4 36 SC Screen Copy Command Example 4 68 EDIT 1000 Commands SE Set Option Uses Command Syntax lt option gt lt value gt Remarks Examples lso CE OLE Case folding Use in line mode to set various EDIT options and defaults SE lt option gt lt value gt Enter option to be set A list of possible options follows The standard defaults are indicated in the column to the right of the option name For a more detailed description refer to the section on EDIT 1000 options in Chapter 3 When required enter numeric or on off value for the option specified If no value is entered and a numeric value is expected EDIT uses the default value for that opt
284. s T T Project Status Tabs before each item Project Status Spaces padded before each Figure 4 42 TK Tab Kill Command Example 4 78 EDIT 1000 Commands TR Transfer Uses Command Syntax lt filedescriptor gt Q Remarks e Use in line mode to transfer to a command file e Use when running EDIT to execute a batch file TR lt filedescriptor gt Q Enter the filename of the file to which control is to be transferred Refer to section in Chapter 3 on filename specification Optional Enter the Quiet option to suppress listing of the transfer file Optional suppression of asking for dangerous command confirmation Enter the current prompt character default to suppress the OK prompt This command transfers to a specified file to execute the commands contained in that file It is important to note that command files do NOT nest For example assume that a transfer command is entered to access Command File A Within Command File A is a transfer command to Command File B Once EDIT is finished executing the commands in File B it returns to the terminal and NOT to Command File A If the transfer command file contains an ER Exit and Replace EC Exit and Create or an A Abort command the applicable command is executed and EDIT terminates When the TR command is entered within a command string for example the EDIT runstring it MUST be the last command in the string Therefore the TR com
285. s Command 1 X lt 5 gt gt 2 amp 1 Break Line Character lt gt The break line character lt gt can be used on the substitute side of an exchange command to insert a new line at the point it occurs There may be more than one lt gt in the substitute pattern and the tagged string recall can be used on either side of it If there is a search window in effect when the exchange is executed text outside the window is copied onto each created line 5 18 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions For example 1 X 7 lt 20 gt amp 1 lt gt amp 2 breaks lines at the first space after column 20 in the following text This is a line with more than 20 characters This is a line with more than 20 characters Figure 5 19 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command 1 X lt 20 gt amp 1 lt gt amp 2 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 19 Creating Patterns Pattern Parsing Changing Cases This section describes how EDIT reads parses a command and the effect this has on the results of the search exchange It also supplies examples of patterns created to accomplish specific tasks EDIT reads patterns in the same way that it reads commands from left to right This process is referred to as parsing and it is necessary to understand this process before effective patterns can be created The order used by EDIT to translate search and exchange commands follows 1 EDIT notes the line range
286. s a SENE aE RTE A Hello Program A AE ESR Ee Working with EDIT 25 case ocais fc A eta ove pA 4s E p OG a S ro Accessing EDIT A hg SEA aS EDIT Runstrine cererea gana ty A yoy erode eae Vee ety eyes EDIT Prompt st gins ee ney A a evn ey Adana tes Getting HEIP Seog AA a Seg ee RE Exts EDIT as Rane hada DIO atone weet oho Ma det AREAS Overview ot EDIT Operations pt A Rete ee O a OG see ee eS The EDIT Work less Vota ra TAL EE AR Usine EDIT to Enter Text 25 22 toes AS Line Mode Editing teccet taria hss Pee dadas ibi can Screen Mode Editiht ct tt arde Pending Liher esa tient coal eta e lanterns dates a EDIT Fil Size Sri cy ip VAS eee PG AS ee eae E File Name Specification ces sade gt cogs a eer ees LAG Bees Dangerous Command Confirmation 0 0 00 c cece cee eee eens Error and Information Messages comica eh vs Aa ewe eevee ewh BANA ee es Chapter 2 Getting Started Tutorial Tntr d ction iia A palace a he Pee AA eae pul ete ae wee Red Prereguisites adc ier A NES MEATS eee Ay Gale E DRT A wae Reha Tutorial Part 1 Screen Mode Editing 0 cous cee AR Ea Contents and Sample File RA IA A As Quick Start BRETCISS tira os ce E A A AA AA Running EDIT EDIT 420 A A ete AA eee Exiting EDIT without Saving Alisa od ee eee eds Tnputting a Fil PV Goes ear bah eet eee ae atte ne hate aie coe OO Editing in Screen Mode Sn Pence eer eg Se elena Peds os Inserting and Deleting Text hati tae ee We ate OMe oa eee ee Moving Around
287. s displayed on the following line The line of text displayed is the pending line This is the text that will be altered by commands entered at the EDIT prompt Any of the EDIT commands including the screen mode S command can be typed in at the prompt and executed by pressing the carriage return If an error is made when entering a command it can be erased by using the backspace key prior to executing the command with a carriage return Note that the left cursor arrow key does not correct line mode commands Many of the EDIT commands can be reversed after execution through use of the Undo UN command The UN command does not reverse the A AS EC ER FCL FCS FI L RU S SE TR UY WC or WR commands Chapter 4 provides descriptions of all EDIT commands Editing in the line mode is inefficient because only one line of text is displayed at a time However if you wish to perform a search or an exchange merge text from another file display file or help information set or show EDIT session options or save the file these activities must be executed from the line mode Line character edits are available in the line mode to enable you to do character editing without using any of the terminal editing keys Line character editing consists of text entry and several control key alpha key combinations Line character editing is possible in conjunction with the following pending line edit commands C Edit Pending Line and Advance a L
288. s you to see and edit an entire screen of text using the local terminal keys and control key combinations e Ascreen mode command that enables you to execute some of the more powerful line mode commands for example search exchange move and copy from screen mode e A system of error informational and instructional messages that keeps you informed of the status of the program and your files e A recovery operation that reconstructs files damaged during an abnormal program termination e A command stack feature that allows you to review modify and re execute any of the last 20 EDIT commands entered during the current EDIT session Manual The following conventions have been used throughout this Conventions Manual Table 1 1 Manual Conventions text EDIT recognizes user entries in both upper and lowercase User input is printed in lowercase letters and is highlighted The only exceptions to this are the commands containing the letter L and the N command Commands containing an L are printed in uppercase because they cannot be distinguished from the number one when entered in lowercase The N com mand is printed in uppercase to distinguish it from the n com mand which represents the entry of a line number Opened file SMART MOI System response is printed as it is displayed by EDIT EDIT 200 lines read uses both uppercase and lowercase letters Used in command syntax display to indicate an EDIT command For example CO
289. screen edits and goes back to previous screen Double to ignore new edits CTRL P does not work on X 25 pad terminals Saves new screen edits and goes back to previous screen Use for X 25 pad terminals Marks line indicated by the current cursor location Following the carriage return places a colon in column 79 of the screen and requires entry of an alphabetic character Copies the line indicated by current cursor location Saves screen edits and quits screen mode Double to ignore new edits Should not be used if your terminal uses Xon Xoff handshake protocol Saves new edits and starts next screen at line indicated by the current cursor position Double to ignore new edits Should not be used if your terminal uses Xon Xoff handshake protocol Same as CTRL S Use for terminals with Xon Xoff handshake protocol Same as CTRL Q Use for terminals with Xon Xoff handshake protocol Same as CTRL S except a large screen is provided Size of screen is determined by amount of terminal memory available Check size available with the SH SL command Note CTRL D If your terminal follows Xon Xoff handshake protocol CTRL Q and CTRL S are not interpreted as EDIT commands Use CTRL U in place of CTRL Q and CTRL T instead of CTRL S Control D CTRL D is a sub mode of screen mode that adds line editing graphic commands to screen mode CTRL D mode can be enabled by typing either CTRL D plus carriage return while in screen mode or by t
290. se EDIT cannot determine your terminal s model number or type If your terminal can support more than EDIT s estimate use the Set Screen Limit SE SL command to set a new maximum number of lines for your screen edit You have the option of saving or ignoring your screen edits each time you move from one screen to another or when you exit the screen mode Control key commands described in the next section are used to move between screens and exit the screen mode All control key commands are followed by a carriage return A single execution of a control key command for example CTRL F to move forward a screen will instruct EDIT to read the screen and update the work file with the new edits Double execution of a control key command for example CTRL F CTRL F instructs EDIT to ignore changes to the current screen All the powerful EDIT commands such as Copy Move Find Exchange Transfer etc must be executed from the line mode Line commands can be executed by exiting the screen mode with the CTRL U or CTRL Q commands In addition the CTRL C command temporarily exits the screen mode to enable you to execute one EDIT line mode command The CTRL C command in screen mode displays the EDIT prompt at the current cursor location After entering an EDIT command the current screen is read before execution of the command After execution of the command EDIT returns to screen mode To avoid reading and saving the screen enter a
291. several options that can be set using the SE command for a single editing session The options are returned to their default value when a new editing session is initiated However if the write WC and WR or File Input FI commands are used to manipulate files without exiting EDIT the options set for the initial EDIT session are maintained The options available for editing sessions are summarized in the tables that follow Table 3 3 EDIT Session Options Option Default Description AC Anchor character used in pattern specification Anchors the pattern to the start of search window Asking for verification of dangerous commands that is A AS D Fl K TR U X and Y Set to OFF to suppress OK prompt During execution of a transfer file asking is always off For D K U X and Y commands prompt is displayed only if command modifies more than one line For the A and Fl commands OK is displayed only if the file has been modified Asking can be suppressed by terminating a command with the prompt character default prompt character is Bell Set to ON to enable bell with EDIT prompt Case folding Must be set to OFF to differentiate between upper and lowercase in pattern searches This option does not affect the EDIT command syntax EDIT accepts commands in either upper or lowercase even if CF off Command separator Used to separate commands in a command or runstring The number of commands is limited by the num
292. space command 3 32 4 92 4 97 Specific Line Number n command 2 21 stack 2 35 standard pattern matching 3 18 starting EDIT 2 7 screen bracket 2 12 screen mode 2 10 string B 3 substitute pattern 2 34 B 3 system crash 1 8 system scratch file 3 47 SZ command 4 74 T T command 4 75 TA command 4 75 Tab Character TC option 3 27 Tab Kill TK command 4 78 tabs delete 4 78 description 4 75 in line mode 3 32 in line mode character edits 3 32 task charts 2 36 TC option 3 27 terminal backspace key 3 31 3 46 display capacity 2 16 displaying maximum lines 3 35 line limit 2 11 local editing keys 2 12 3 34 text copying 4 12 display formats 3 12 inserting 4 33 moving 2 29 wrap around 2 12 3 42 TF command 4 75 TI command 3 8 4 77 Time Stamp TS option 3 27 time stamping files 3 8 TK command 4 78 TL command 4 75 TM command 4 75 TP command 4 75 TR command 4 79 trailing blanks 4 8 Transfer TR command 4 79 truncation 1 13 3 3 3 13 3 14 3 32 3 33 4 8 TS command 4 75 TS option 3 27 TU command 4 75 tutorial 2 1 typing in text 2 12 U U command 3 18 3 20 4 81 UN command 1 2 1 11 2 29 3 31 3 46 4 83 UN option 4 72 unconditional exchange 4 81 Undo UN command 1 11 1 15 2 29 undo list 3 46 4 83 4 84 undo list yank 4 84 undoing commands 1 2 4 83 upper lower case 1 3 5 20 See also Case Folding CF option UY command 4 83 4 84 Vv Ver
293. sregard the search window columns during the search Remarks The B command is similar to the F command except that the start search default is line 1 whereas the start search default for the F command is the pending line The B command uses and sets the default Find match pattern Examples Figure 4 3 illustrates the use of the B command to find a pattern to find all occurrences of a pattern to find all occurrences without listing the matched lines and to find all occurrences of a pattern with the Case Folding option off to differentiate between upper and lowercase letters b zoo Using the B command to find a single occurrence of zoo b zoo a 00007 Using the B command to find a single occurrence of zoo 00009 You can ignore the sentence above that refers to zoo 00011 Using B with the A option to find all occurrences of zoo EOF 3 matches CF Using the B command to find a single occurrence of zoo b zoo ag EOF 3 matches CF b The a 00001 The B command with the A option finds all occurrences of a pattern 00005 It finds upper and lower case versions of the pattern if cf on 00006 The B command differentiates between upper and lower case if cf off EOF 3 matches CF The B command with the A option finds all occurrences of a pattern se cf of Case folding b The a 00001 The B command with the A option finds all occurrences of a pattern 00006 The B command differentiates between upper and lower case if cf off EOF 2 matches
294. ssage when you attempt to save the screen edits with a control key combination command refer to the S command description in Chapter 4 EDIT typically displays 21 lines of text at a time 10 lines above the current pending line or current cursor position the pending line and 10 lines below the pending line A command is available to display the maximum number of lines allowed by the terminal Although the screen mode provides an efficient means of editing the more powerful EDIT commands such as the Move Copy Find and Exchange commands must be entered from the line mode Control key commands are available in screen mode to enable you to escape the screen mode to execute the more powerful line mode commands All control key commands entered must be followed by a carriage return For more information on the screen mode refer to the tutorial in Chapter 2 Chapter 3 and to the description of the Screen S command in Chapter 4 When EDIT is run on an existing file in the Line Mode the first line of the work file is displayed The displayed line is the current line available for editing and is called the pending line This line remains as the pending line until you request a new pending line EDIT 1000 Basics EDIT File Size File Name Specification Dangerous Command Confirmation with an EDIT command EDIT always maintains a pending line pointer into the work file A specific line of text can be accessed by enterin
295. st Cycles Total 366989 Figure 5 26 Sample Data File EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 27 PM Summary cache Figure 5 26 provides an example of one of the results files This file starts a line that describes the set of input data used In this case X 16 is a parameter to the simulator and the data set called KALDE The name of the data set is to be included in the summary table header The stack of dots indicates that lines of the file have been deleted to provide a smaller figure for this text Several of the lines displayed are retrieved to be included in the summary table A Regular Expressions pattern is constructed to enable EDIT to match the lines by searching for the text used to label the required numbers TUE 27 OCT 1987 for KALDE expansions cycles executions 1024 Summary cache size 14285 13511 11787 3666 3666 3129 for FFT expansions 78088 366989 78088 353033 78088 323277 78088 192065 78088 192065 78088 182998 cycles executions Figure 5 27 Desired Output Figure 5 27 shows the summary table file that is to be constructed It consists of a time stamp followed by a label describing the data set Summary for KALDE and a table of numbers showing the results of each simulation Each line in the table comes from one run of the simulator The table file is built by running EDIT several times once for each output file produced by the simulator An EDIT com
296. st line of the copied text to overwrite current text If at the end of the file this command appends the copied text The Undo UN command reverses the BC command Refer also to the BM Block Move command 4 6 EDIT 1000 Commands Exam ples Figure 4 4 illustrates the use of the BC command to copy columns three and four of lines one through three to line three columns four and five Note the use of the LN List Numbered Lines command to list the lines before and after execution of the BC command AAxxAAA 1 LN 4 00001 AAxxAAA 00002 BByyBBB 00003 CCzzCCC 00004 DDDDDDD B CEZZECE 11 3 oe 324 4 COZXXCC DDDyyDD ZZ CCzxxCC Pending line is line 3 1 LN 00001 AAxxAAA 00002 BByyBBB 00003 CCzxxCC 00004 DDDyyDD 00005 ZZ Figure 4 4 BC Block Copy Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 7 BK Kill Trailing Blanks amp Truncate Lines Uses e Use to delete all trailing blanks on every line of the file e Use to truncate lines longer than a maximum line length set with the line length option SE LE Command 1 BK Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 BK Syntax linespec 1 linespec2 Optional line range If no line range is specified the operation begins at line 1 and continues to the end of the file See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks To check the line length prior to executing the BK command use SH LE Show Line Lengt
297. store the ID segments If EDIT is loaded by LINK though it cannot be loaded as a permanent program Alternatively EDIT can be loaded as described below The system manager can load EDIT as a permanent program for security convenience and better performance The manager can load EDIT as a permanent program by specifying the IH option in the LOADR runstring and the OR PE command EDIT must be loaded online not at generation time A LOADR command file called ED1K6 and a runstring that uses the command file for loading EDIT as a permanent program are shown below LOADR command file ED1K6 OP PE OP EB SZ 32 LIB SED1K6 Loading EDIT into RTE 6 VM LIB SED000 RE SEDIT RU LOADR IH ED1K6 PE Uses command file ED1K6 The system manager should load EDIT shortly after booting Doing so prevents EDIT from being loaded in the middle of the RTE system tracks possibly minimizing the number of contiguous tracks available EDIT has five segments EDITO through EDIT4 If EDIT is NOT loaded as a permanent program the system manager must also load the RTE utility program TSIDM TSIDM manages ID segments refer to the RTE 6 VM System Manager s Reference Manual part number 92084 90009 if you need to know more about TSIDM If you want to load EDIT as a temporary program you must execute the FMGR command SP for all five segments as well as the main If TSIDM is not loaded you must RP
298. t as those entered interactively If you enter the name of a file that does not exist for example if TESTFILE is a new file and include the screen mode command S in the runstring EDIT displays the message No such file TESTFILE An ER or the first WR will create it and places you in screen mode The screen displayed contains only the start and stop brackets indicating that the file did not previously exist To check if the file will be created under the name entered in the command string return to line mode and enter the status command If a command included in the runstring cannot be executed by EDIT EDIT ignores the rest of the commands and immediately places you in line mode Note Naming a File Creating or Accessing a File If commands that issue the OK prompt are included they must be suppressed with a slash otherwise EDIT places you in line mode to solicit a response to the prompt and will ignore the rest of the commands For more information on EDIT options refer to the EDIT Session Options section later in this chapter For instructions on entering the runstring to initiate EDIT sessions refer to the Tutorial in Chapter 2 of this manual Back quotes can be used in the EDIT runstring to delimit characters for which CI normally performs special processing Use of the single back quotes will prevent this special process ing Refer to the CI User s Manual for a description of the chara
299. t filedescriptor e Use from line mode to display a block of lines with their respective line numbers All lines except the new pending line are listed with line numbers e Use to turn on the display of line numbers for succeeding L commands LN 20 linespec 1 linespec 2 LN max list filedescriptor Optional line range May be absolute numbers separated by a space or a comma or line specification characters Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Note that EDIT only accepts ranges that list lines in ascending order For example EDIT does not accept a line range such as 10 5 If both range limits are omitted the LN command default is the current pending line However the number of lines displayed is determined by the maximum number of lines option if it is entered Optional maximum number of lines to be listed Limits any line range specified If both the second line specification and maximum are omitted only 20 lines are listed To default the maximum number to the range specified enter two commas after the LN command For example 1 50 LN LISTFILE This option must be specified or defaulted with two commas if a list file is to be used Optional Indicates that the list file named is to be appended to lines added to the end of the file and not overwritten Use the plus option without a filename to append to the open list file
300. t the topic DEveloping Programs 3 At the Program Development Menu select EDIT by entering ed For a general discussion of how to develop a program first select in Introduction to Program Development 4 The system displays the EDIT menu illustrated in Figure 1 1 ing Started With Easy Commands to edit any file Edits h and exchange POwerful edits Please type the name lst 2 letters will suffice of the section you would like to study Figure 1 1 RTE A Hello Program Menu 5 Type the first two letters of the desired section and press the carriage return 6 To exit the Hello program continue to enter ex at each menu until the CI gt prompt is displayed EDIT 1000 Basics 1 5 Working with EDIT Accessing EDIT EDIT Runstring EDIT Prompt Getting Help 1 6 EDIT 1000 Basics The EDIT 1000 program is accessed from either the Command Interpreter CI or File Manager FMGR RTE user interfaces The examples in this manual use the CI gt prompt The EDIT runstring is the command or group of commands used to initiate the EDIT 1000 program The simplest form of the EDIT runstring consists of the word EDIT This form of the command string accesses the EDIT 1000 program but does not access a specific text file for editing Specific files can be accessed after EDIT has been initiated All EDIT commands including the runstring must be followed by a carriage return An example of
301. tacharacters e Use with Set option RT Return set to ON default to return to pending line after search if no match found or if the All A search option is specified e Use with RT set to OFF to remain at the line below the line range specified if no match is found or the All A search option is specified e Use with Set option CF Case Folding set to OFF to differentiate between upper and lower case letters during search e Use with the horizontal search window set the WC option to restrict the search to within specified columns 1 B last find pattern linespec 1 linespec 2 B pattern A V Q N Optional line range If no line range is specified the search begins at line 1 and continues to the end of the file See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Pattern to be found The suggested delimiter for a pattern string is the slash Any punctuation mark can be used except comma or spaces First and last delimiter must match If no options are used with the command the last delimiter may be omitted Optional all flag Enter to find and print all occurrences of a pattern Optional reverse flag Enter to find a line that does NOT contain the pattern specified Optional quiet flag Enter the Quiet option with the A option to indicate the total number of matched lines without listing the lines Optional no window flag Enter to instruct EDIT to di
302. te that you can use the EDIT Run RU command to run a copy of CI or FMGR while in EDIT EDIT retains the source file name that is entered in the runstring or via a File Input FI command as the default file Anytime you use a command that accesses a file EC ER FI K L M TR WC WR you can choose to take advantage of this filename defaulting or you can enter a new filename There are several ways to default all or part of the filename For example if a dash is specified in the filename the character in the same position in the default name is placed into the new name The at sign can also be entered to default either that filename or the file type extension If a type extension but no name is entered EDIT uses the default filename If no type extension is entered EDIT uses an empty type extension If both the filename and extension are omitted but at least one character is present in the filename field both the filename and extension are defaulted For example File Descriptor Default File Specified File Descriptor Descriptor in Command Used DIR TEST TXT new NEW TXT DIR TEST TXT a k mac TASK MAC DIR TEST TXT tmp TEST TMP DIR TEST TXT scratch tmp SCRATCH TEST TMP DIR TEST TXT text TEXT DIR TEST TXT TEST TXT If a security code is entered and the cartridge is not the cartridge is taken from the source file name For example if the source file name is INPUT XX and you enter the co
303. tely the best choice However if you require more complex matching or a complicated exchange you will benefit from the flexibility and power of Regular Expressions ON matching One major difference between Regular Expressions OFF and ON is the speed with which EDIT scans text lines for matches to the pattern When Regular Expressions are OFF EDIT matches the shortest possible sequence of the pattern and is therefore much faster When Regular Expressions are ON EDIT conducts repeated scans of the text line to find the longest possible sequence of the pattern This becomes most critical when the wildcard character is used to match more than one text character For example consider the text line Yes we have no bananas The command F a a with Regular Expressions OFF shortest possible match would match at the following sequences Yes we Have no bd rfana s The same command with Regular Expressions ON longest possible match would match this sequence Yes we Have no bananas Several of the metacharacters are used for patterns specified in exchange commands Within the exchange commands G X and Y you specify both the pattern to be matched and the character string to be substituted The metacharacters lt n gt and are used on the pattern match side of an exchange command The characters amp n gt n and lt n are used on the substitute side of exchange commands Regular Expression operato
304. ter is on the same line as the first character or five lines below Breaks line into two lines at the current cursor position Blanks are inserted at the front of the second line so that it lines up with EDIT 1000 Operations 3 37 3 38 CTRL J CTRL C Note CTRL F CTRL P CTRL R CTRL K CTRL O CTRL Q CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL X EDIT 1000 Operations the first non blank character of the first line ESC 4 sets a new left margin and CTRL B breaks the line at the new margin Margins are then reset by the command Joins current line to following line Also resets margins see CTRL A Allows execution of one line mode command After carriage return EDIT prompt is displayed if C is used and if C C is used Enter line mode command s When multiple commands are entered on the same line separate the commands with a vertical bar Press the carriage return After command execution EDIT returns to screen mode with cursor positioned at the current pending line Do not use the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor from the line provided for line mode entry after use of CTRL C When the carriage return is used the line containing the command to be executed is deleted If the cursor is on another line when the carriage return is pressed a line of text is deleted and the com mand becomes part of your text Saves new screen edits and advances to next screen Double to ignore new edits Saves new
305. th lines after an exchange occurs S Optional single exchange flag The S option allows at most one exchange per line Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the G command The G command is similar to the X command except that the X command provides a count of the lines affected by the exchange the G command does not Examples Figure 4 19 illustrates the use of the G command to exchange the number 2 with the string tu to exchange the number 8 with the string ate and to exchange the string it with the string followed by a space The SE Set command is used to set the search window WC to columns one through eighteen and the G command is then used to exchange a single occurrence of the letter W with the letter C Finally the G command is used to exchange the letter X with the slash Note that the pattern separator used is the exclamation point Gra2ity ci Ayer Gratuity I8itall g 8 ate I ate itall MESAS AE I ate it all Wombat Wombat se wc 1 18 g w c s Combat Wombat Womcat A B X C D 2000 ACA A B C D 2000 Figure 4 19 G Character Exchange on Pending Line Command Examples EDIT 1000 Commands 4 27 H Help Uses Command Syntax command command Remarks 4 28 EDIT 1000 Commands Use to display online quick reference information on EDIT commands abbreviations rules for pattern specifications special control characters for pending line edits metacharacters
306. the hour and minute This field is automatically updated when EDIT writes a file Exit and create new file Exit and replace source file Abort EDIT session without replacing source file Same as A but save scratch file Replace source file and remain in EDIT session Create new file and remain in EDIT session Input file to replace current source file Merge file specified to after pending line Create or open list file specified Create or open list file specified Close source file Close list file Undo a modification Show undo list Recover line s from the undo list Getting Started Tutorial 2 43 Table 2 12 Task Chart for Commands with Common Defaults Commands with Common Defaults Search for F Last search pattern specified a pattern Last search pattern specified forward Last search pattern specified backward Last search pattern specified Last match substitute string specified Last match substitute string specified Last match substitute string specified Replace Source file source file Source file Create a List file list file List file Unconditional U Last match substitute string specified exchange Delete Last search pattern specified 2 44 Getting Started Tutorial EDIT 1000 Operations Introduction This chapter provides details on the operation of the EDIT 1000 program The contents include Working with EDIT Line Specification Pattern Specification Search a
307. the last inclusive The match side of this exchange command begins with the anchor character This tells EDIT to start matching at the start of the line By anchoring the pattern you can safeguard against matching lines that you do not want to match The next character used in the pattern is the left curly brace which specifies the start of a tag field or an item to be reinserted in a different position on the exchanged line A tag field consists of a group of characters from the text being searched These characters can be used in the substitute side of an exchange command The tagged field used in this example is the filename that is to be copied to the substitute side of the exchange The end of the tag field is specified by the matching right curly brace just after the plus metacharacter EDIT requires that curly brace metacharacters match up That is for each left curly brace there must be a matching right curly brace at the same nesting level If curly braces are not matched EDIT reports an error as in the example following 1 X ftn7 x amp 1 0 q print amp 1 A EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions Gathering Data from Files The caret points at the bad pattern and not at the first incorrect character Note also that the anchor character in the preceding pattern is before the tag character The caret is an anchor character only if it is the first character in the pattern If it had been pla
308. the retrieved line into the required header text It does this by matching the entire line with the beginning and ending signs and tagging the character between the double quote and comma This exchange produces the line Summary for KALDE EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions 5 33 5 34 Next the fixed text headers are put into the table file All the text is fixed so the EDIT space command can be used to append lines of text The commands from the CYCS1 EDIT command file are listed following Note the space in front of each line of text in the figure of CYCS1 cache expansions executions cycles size total Next the first column of the summary table is constructed The number for this column is from a labeled line in the results file Note the following example data file RMEM size 32 Cache size 16 and the relevant commands for the command file d cache size Q g lt 8 gt 0 9 S amp 1 All lines in the results file that follow the last header line and precede the text line cache size are deleted with the D command The Q quiet option used with the D command tells EDIT not to list the lines deleted The G command finds and tags a nine character string that ends with the last digit on the line It then exchanges the string inserting two blanks before the tagged blanks and number and deleting all other characters on the line This sequence of commands has created the first column of the table
309. the screen and the line mode pending line is the line your cursor was on in screen mode unless there are wrap around lines extra long lines If you use the C command the screen is read and the pending line is the line your cursor was on when in screen mode If you use the U or Q command EDIT reads the screen and the pending line is the line after the last line shown for the previous screen For example if the last line of the screen is line 21 use of the U command makes line 22 the new pending line If you use the U U or Q Q command EDIT does not read the screen and the new pending line is the first line of the screen from which the U U was executed EDIT contains a wealth of information that is useful to view during the editing session This information must be accessed through the line mode EDIT s online reference facility is accessed with the Help H or command Information on various EDIT options and defaults is displayed using the SH Show command 2 20 Getting Started Tutorial Bia Online reference provides brief descriptions of all the EDIT commands and many of the options The Help command used by itself displays a menu of all items for which online reference is available The command can also be used in conjunction with any of the Help menu items to display the online reference information available for that menu item To try the Help command use the U key combination to escape screen mode an
310. the simplest EDIT runstring follows CI gt edit For more information on EDIT options and commands that can be included in the runstring refer to the EDIT Session Options section in Chapter 3 and the description of commands in Chapter 4 of this Manual For instructions on entering the runstring to initiate EDIT sessions refer to Chapter 2 of this Manual Once an editing session has been initiated with the run string EDIT commands are entered at the EDIT prompt The default EDIT prompt character is the slash The EDIT prompt character can be set to any non alphanumeric character except a space or a comma using the Set SE command to set the PC Prompt Character option Refer to the description of the SE command in Chapter 4 of this Manual EDIT s online quick reference facility provides brief descriptions of the commands the special characters and other online options The H HE and commands can be used interchangeably from EDIT s line mode Examples of the commands are provided following entered at the EDIT prompt Use To Obtain H or HE or A summary of online reference lt command gt Information on a specific command EX An explanation of EDIT abbreviations RE A description of regular expressions used in pattern matching LS A description of line specifications PA Pattern descriptions PL A description of pending line character editing RM A description of the recovery mode
311. they are required or optional This manual uses the following syntax to represent line specifications linespec 1 linespec 2 Both linespec 1 and linespec 2 consist of a base line specification and an optional line specification offset lt base line specification gt lt line specification offset gt The base line specification indicates the number of lines from the beginning of the file The base line may be a number such as 42 or one of the following special characters The pending line The last line in the file Same as last line in the file A marked line where the mark indicated by x are upper or lowercase alphabetic characters A Z Search forward to line containing specified pattern Search backward to line containing specified pattern Used for linespec 2 to indicate that its base line value is the value of linespec 1 including the linespec 1 offset For example the following line specification consists of two linespecs 10 20 In the first linespec the period is the base line specification and the 10 is the offset In the second linespec the asterisk is the base line specification and the 20 is the offset A command that includes this line specification affects text from 10 lines above the pending line to 20 lines beyond the beginning point of the first linespec for a total of 21 lines If the base line specification is omitted but an offset is entered EDIT uses the c
312. this by editing the command with the local terminal keys prior to pressing the carriage return For example if you used U to escape the screen mode and entered the command stack command your entries and the system response might look something like this El Commands SE CF OFF S SE CF ON Try using the command stack with the sample text TESTFILE Change one of your exchange commands and re execute Congratulations you ve finished the tutorial To exit and save a file that you re finished editing which command do you use If you need help the answer is printed in the left hand margin The ER Exit and Replace command saves your work and returns you to the RTE user interface For more practice in using EDIT refer to Chapter 5 EDIT Regular Expressions Getting Started Tutorial 2 35 Quick Reference Task Charts Table 2 2 Task Chart for Moving around the Editing Screen Moving around the Editing Screen Task Command Screen or Line Mode To go to the end ofa line To go to the beginning of a line To go to the next screen saving edits on the current screen To go to next screen without saving edits To go to previous screen saving edits on current screen To go to previous screen without saving edits To start a new screen from cursor position saving edits on current screen To start a new screen from cursor position without saving edits To display an
313. tical Window VW option 3 27 4 85 B 3 viewing options 3 29 See also SH command viewing information 2 20 VW option 3 27 WwW W command 2 2 2 22 2 28 2 39 4 85 WC command 2 9 2 24 3 6 4 86 WC option 3 27 5 8 wildcard character 2 33 See also indefinite character window definition B 3 horizontal search 3 18 Index 7 Window W command 2 22 Window Columns WC option 3 27 WN command 4 85 work area 1 8 work file 1 2 1 7 1 12 2 17 3 4 3 6 3 46 3 50 WR command 2 9 2 24 4 87 wrap around 2 12 Write and Create WC command 2 9 Write and Replace WR command 2 9 writing to a file 3 7 4 86 4 87 Index 8 WU command 4 85 X X command 2 34 3 18 4 88 Xon Xoff handshake protocol 2 16 2 17 3 38 4 63 Y Y command 3 18 4 90 Manual Part No 92074 90001 Printed in U S A December 1992 h HEWLETT E1292 CA Packaro
314. tinguishing between Uppercase and Lowercase 000000000 2 32 Search Metacharacters ont dis one Bee Re ee a 2 33 Exchanging a Pattern 65 ie hes a nena tee eee setae aw eo eee ne Een REA 2 34 Repeating a Previous Command A AA A wee 2 35 Exiting amp Saving ER sce A neha tios 2 35 Quick Reterence Task Charts ss sy tcwectb s weacuva Festa RS 2 36 Chapter 3 EDIT 1000 Operations io font i Ae IA ESS tM ASE Ae ttt cits AN 3 1 WORLD e Ree a cet a a do MACS 3 3 The EDIT R string neserme ete thst gies Ut e ALO 3 3 More on the EDIT Runstring jis sie ua ii 664 09 FS A e SSS es 3 4 Naminga Bleu oth esea SIRS INES od HOG RISING Rowe ea a 3 5 Creating or Accessing a Flete 3 5 Pate Pl bara a Gs vee eee ae Rae Tee A AA AA A 240 3 8 Listing Lines to A Printer o AAA AAA teen seas 3 9 Closing Biles a A AER EA AAA EAT A AAA a ar 3 10 NA A aie he ages sic ge A Mapes Huse aenea 3 11 Elle Naming Defaults rotos sie ae we ea Oa 3 11 Mex Wisplay Formats sereias a ra alec dada EOS ROLE eae a ON RS GPa ae 3 12 EDIT Command Syntak i unas hish afew she hye Whe at teh eaten dale eee eine 3 13 Lime Length ee eG oul at hua le uh Wee ln hae a eG ae A Rak ue tee ead 3 13 PHC Size Limit fs me Chee oh eae eet Sh eee ewe howe eee pee es 3 14 Line SPECICAON A AO ew EY ha CO ROR ee hes 3 15 Pattern Specitication lt eus hd nye eh ae A VO ARS 3 18 Pattern Defaults EIA 3 20 Command Parsi oo A A A E aa wale ee 3 21 Regular Expressions Pattern Specification
315. tion Message Cause Action Message Cause Action Block mode must be off Error message indicating that the block mode is enabled on your terminal The block mode must be turned off before EDIT will function correctly Turn off block mode or see System Manager Break Workspace unchanged Informational message Displayed in response to a break command used during a MO Move or CO Copy command if the break command is detected prior to file modification None required Can not recover because of incorrect data in the work file To avoid re entering recover mode purge lt filename gt Should this file be purged now _ Informational message displayed during a recovery operation indicating that the file was so corrupt that EDIT could not recover any data This message indicates that there probably isn t any data in the file at all Message instructs user to purge the file to avoid re entering recovery operation The name of the file to be purged is displayed at the position of the lt filename gt Requires user to enter a yes or y to purge the file or a no or n to postpone a decision Enter an affirmative response to purge the work file or enter a no or n to postpone the decision and see your System Manager Closed file lt filename gt Informational message indicating that a file has been closed as a result of a command entered by the user The filename is displayed at the position of lt filename gt N
316. to display the text Impossible Figure 4 23 Insert Line Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 33 J Join Lines Uses Use in line mode to combine two lines The current pending line or the line specified and the following line are combined into one line and displayed as the current pending line Command J Default Command linespec 1 J Syntax linespec 1 Optional line specification Indicates which line is to be joined to the following line Default joins the current pending line to the following line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Remarks The joined line is the new pending line after execution of this command If the new joined line is longer than the line length it is truncated to the line length without a message The UN Undo command can be used to reverse the J command Examples Figure 4 24 illustrates the use of the J command to join three lines of text The LN List Numbered command is used before the change to display the text 1 LN 00001 Mission 00002 Impossible 00003 on today EOF 1 Mission 3 MissionImpossible 0 MissionImpossibleon today Figure 4 24 J Join Lines Command Example 4 34 EDIT 1000 Commands K Kill Lines Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 max list filedescriptor Remarks e Use to delete the current line A line range can be specified
317. to two he A TAMIA ERES O New pending line is listed Go back 2 and list 2 EZ 1 Illustrating the breaking of a line into two Figure 4 7 C Edit Pending Line and Advance Line Command Example EDIT 1000 Commands 4 11 CO Copy Lines Uses e Use to copy a range of lines to be inserted below the current pending line e Use with the Kx command to mark and copy sections of text Command CO Default Command linespec 1 linespec 2 CO Q Syntax linespec 1 linespec 2 Range of lines to be copied An ending range specification is optional If ending range is omitted only one line is copied See the section on line specifications in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Q Optional Enter the Q option to suppress display of lines copied Remarks The Undo UN command reverses the CO command Examples Figure 4 8 illustrates the use of the CO command to copy three lines of text Note the use of the LN List Numbered Lines command to display the text before and after execution of the CO command EN 00001 GET 18 00002 GO TO 20 00003 PRINT 21 EOF MISCO 00001 00002 00003 EN 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 EOF Figure 4 8 CO Copy Lines Command Example 4 12 EDIT 1000 Commands D Delete Lines Uses e Use to delete lines up to but not including the line in which the pattern specified occurs If no pattern is located or if the A all option
318. ts A new file is created using the EC Exit and Create command while the ER Exit and Replace command updates the original text file EDIT protects your original text file by applying the changes made during the editing session to a work file which begins as a copy of your text file When the editing session is terminated the work file is cleared Terminate your editing session with the ER Exit and Replace com mand Because you entered a filename when you first started the ED IT session EDIT will allow you to use the ER command instead of the EC command and will not require you to enter the filename again when exiting the session Both the EC and ER commands return you to the RTE user interface The following is an example of the EC command note that EDIT does not accept the EC command without a filename M es cestiile Created file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 end of edit CI gt Following is an example of the ER command Fess Closed file TESTFILE HERMAN 4 24 38 end of edit CI gt EDIT limits the number of records lines in a file to 32 500 If you attempt to read in a larger file EDIT displays a warning that the read was stopped before the end of the file was found If you then execute an ER command the file is truncated without warning If you receive the Line limit reached message while reading in a file restart the EDIT session and us
319. ts margins the terminal automatically advances the cursor a line when reaching the last line position of the original line Use the cursor arrow keys to find the last two line positions and insert the dots After editing the line position cursor on the first line and press the carriage return R Replace Pending Line with Text Uses Command Default Command Syntax linespec 1 lt text gt Remarks Use in line mode to replace the text of the current pending line with text entered with the R command R linespec 1 R lt text gt Optional line specification Use to replace text on a specific line If omitted the command replaces text on the current pending line Refer to the section on line specification in Chapter 3 for a complete list of possible line specifications Replacement text to be entered on the pending line The Undo UN command reverses the R command If the first character of the replacement text is U precede it with the escape character default to ensure that EDIT does not interpret the entry as a Run RU command EDIT 1000 Commands 4 59 RU Run Program Uses Command Syntax lt program gt lt runstring gt Remarks Examples ru edit Use in line mode to run another program such as another version of EDIT or the Command Interpreter CI RU lt program gt lt runstring gt Enter name of program followed by the proper runstring if necessary If the current s
320. u modify during an EDIT session The type 1 work file is reformatted and copied to the source file or another file by the EC ER WC or WR commands The name of the work file depends on the operating system under which you are running EDIT Under any operating system the scratch file cartridge can be specified in the EDIT runstring by specifying the S option An existing work file can be specified for recover with the R runstring option RTE A Work File Considerations Ennnx SCRATCH crn size Ennnx 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 size OR Ennnx 0 crn 1 size where File name constructed as follows The clone name under RTE A is usually EDIT The session ID number replaces characters 2 4 filling from the right a single digit ID number replaces only character 4 a two digit number replaces characters 3 and 4 and a three digit ID number replaces characters 2 4 If the clone name contains fewer than five characters as in EDIT the fifth character in Ennnx is replaced with an asterisk For example EDIT in session 32 creates the following file ED32 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 512 EDIT in session 178 creates E178 0000000000 EDIT SCRATCH 1 512 The SCRATCH or SCRATCHEDIT directory First EDIT tries to create a file on SCRATCH If is it successful EDIT then checks to see if the SCRATCH directory is on RAM disk SCRATCH must be of adequate size to accommodate any files created
321. uppercase B If your terminal does not have the line drawing character set installed you can still use the move and copy features of the CTRL D mode Printing can be done on any printer that supports the HP line drawing sets When you enter a CTRL D during screen mode with CTRL D submode enabled edit responds by turning on an inverse video EDIT 1000 Commands 4 63 4 64 EDIT 1000 Commands mark around the current cursor position It also saves the screen location of this point in an internal list of points Entering additional CTRL Ds displays additional inverse video marks on the screen and adds a point to the points list These points become the arguments to the CTRL D mode commands Normally these points define a closed polygon around the area to be used by the CTRL D command When two consecutive points having different row and column addresses are used to define a line or an edge a horizontal line or edge is defined first followed by a vertical line or edge to reach the second point Note that lines and edges must be horizontal or vertical Whenever there is an inverse video point displayed you are in CTRL D mode While in CTRL D mode characters are not echoed as they are entered Rather they are interpreted as CTRL D mode commands see the following list when carriage return is pressed If the entered characters do not form a valid CTRL D command after pressing carriage return the terminal bell will sound and the curs
322. urrent pending line as the default base line specification EDIT 1000 Operations 3 15 3 16 n 2 n n The optional lt line specification offset gt is the number of lines relative to the base line specification When written as a number relative to the base line the following syntax is used where n refers to an integer Negative n lines relative to the base line Same as n negative n lines relative to base line Positive n lines relative to the base line If only a or is used EDIT uses a default of one line That is 1 For some commands the first specification indicates where in the file a change is to take place For example in the syntax for the Merge M command you first enter the line where text is to be inserted merged from another file then enters the M command and the name of the file from which text is to be merged and then enters the line number of the first line of text to be merged followed by the number of lines to be merged The command syntax is abbreviated like this lt linespec 1 gt M lt file descriptor gt lt start line gt lt lines gt EDIT 1000 Operations Note that the Merge command has two versions of the command syntax refer to the description of the M command in Chapter 4 of this manual Because the line specification is optional each EDIT command has a default that is used if the command is entered without a line specification EDIT closely
323. us CTRL D mode command and reenter CTRL D mode If the previous command was Copy or Move the locator points are not restored Undo the last CTRL D mode command Normally the screen will be read before the CTRL D mode command is executed If there have not been any screen mode changes to the area to be affected by the CTRL D mode command that is going to be executed the screen read time can be saved by entering an N with the command B Bold P Paired E Erase Normal Box Bold Box EDIT 1000 Operations 3 41 Screen Mode Error Message Line Length Limit Exiting Screen Mode 3 42 EDIT 1000 Operations If the beginning or ending screen bracket lines are deleted EDIT displays the following message Stop and or Start Line s Not Found O Saves Original Text Written To Screen S Saves Text Just Read From Screen B Saves Both Inserts Screen Text Before Original Text What Should Be Saved Enter O to save the original screen contents S to save all text that EDIT read in as it rolled it across the screen or B to save both the original screen contents and the new text read in If you are unsure of what should be saved B is the safest action as it is easier to delete duplicated text than it is to re enter lost text In screen mode editing the screen line limit is 78 characters To enter lines longer that 78 characters use the cursor arrow keys to place two periods at columns 79 and 80 of the screen then
324. used for regular expressions line specifications and to list all help messages H command or command Information on any EDIT command can be displayed by entering the command mnemonic after the H command The question mark may be used in place of the H mnemonic The command mnemonic for which help is desired is entered as above The MORE feature permits help information to be displayed one screen at a time Pressing the letter a aborts the listing pressing the return key displays the rest of the current help message without pausing Pressing any other key causes the next screen to be displayed Entry of the H or command by itself displays the online reference menu Figure 4 20 shows the help menu EDIT 1000 A abort J B top amp find K BC block copy Kx BK blank kill commands REV 5010 lt 890125 1210 gt join li kill li set mar list I block move Ll P then 1 I li li ne le nes i copy lines del to match create Q exit replace exit find file close D ER E nj Hj RO file input fill text no list X help header line insert line command command EX abbreviations PL pending line edits merge move line copy pl edit pl line edit replace line number run program screen edit screen copy set options show options help PA RE 2 LS SZ file size T tabs TI TK TR U uncond X UN UY W time t
325. used to edit files that are up to 32 500 lines records long When EDIT s work file exceeds 32 500 lines a read operation for any file input is terminated and additional editing is prohibited If you attempt to edit a file that exceeds 32 500 lines EDIT will read in the first 32 500 lines and report that the line limit has been exceeded Do not execute an ER Exit and Replace command at this point or the source file will be truncated to 32 500 lines Instead break the over sized file into several smaller files edit them individually and then re merge them First use the FI lt smallerfilename gt command to clear EDIT s work space and place you in a new file without truncating the original over sized file Create several of these smaller files merging in portions of the larger file using the EDIT Merge M command with a line range Exit each of the smaller files using the WR Write and Replace command to create a new file Edit the new files individually and then merge them together again using the RTE CI MERGE utility Line Specification pattern pattern The line specification indicates the line or line range affected by the command The line specification consists of zero one or two linespecs If it is unclear where the first linespec stops and the second begins the linespecs must be separated by a space or a comma The semantics for each command indicates how many if any linespecs are applicable and whether
326. ut For the B option reaching the end of the command file or encountering an error causes EDIT to abort itself without updating the source file EDIT sets a status of 0 or 1 in the CI variable RETURNI to indicate how the editing session interactive or batch was terminated The value 0 indicates that EDIT was terminated with EDIT 1000 Operations 3 49 an Exit ER or EC command The value 1 indicates that EDIT was terminated with the Abort A command or that EDIT aborted itself instead of asking for user input because the B option was included in the runstring This returned status can be tested by using the CI IF command Entering Multiple ee EDIT cio o on ce aoe the runstring in an command file or during interactive Commands on operation Each command is separated from the next by a special One Line character called the command separator The default for this character is the vertical bar and it can be changed to any punctuation character other than a space or a comma by using the SE CS command Multiple commands on one line are then executed in order from left to right When multiple commands are entered on one line during an interactive editing session the entire command string up to 79 characters is saved in the command stack In a command string with multiple EDIT commands a failed command such as a no match in a find command causes EDIT to ignore the next command and to return to interactive operation
327. utorial use the following command from the RTE CI user interface to enter EDIT 13 CI gt edit Next enter the S Screen command at the EDIT prompt to access the screen mode With the cursor positioned on the bottom screen bracket line use the INS LINE key on your terminal to insert enough blank lines to type in the sample text illustrated in Figure 2 14 Use the INS CHAR DEL CHAR INS LINE and DEL LINE keys as necessary until the text is complete EDIT 1000 is a powerful screen editor designed to help programmers develop software quickly and accurately with minimal effort EDIT 1000 helps the user create and manipulate files of upper and lower case ASCII characters Lines strings and characters can be inserted deleted copied or moved within the file Files to be edited can be source language programs or text material EDIT 1000 interacts with the user through edit commands and is designed to operate in the following modes Screen mode in which the user types in a screen of text and modifies the text using any of the HP terminal s editing features Line mode in which edit commands operate on groups of one or more lines In the screen mode th ditor treats the terminal screen as a window through which the user can view a section of text A cursor within this window indicates the character at which editing will take place The user controls the cursor with the help of the terminal and can also
328. xed items in the following sample text XZY XaY XOY XY Figure 5 8 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F x A Z0 9 y The character class specifies characters that are non alphabetic and non numeric The first two lines match because the dot and plus sign between the X and Y fit the requirement The third and fourth lines do not match because there are alphabetic and numeric characters between the X and Y The fifth line does not match because there is no character between the X and Y A caret in a character class that is not immediately after the left square bracket is the caret itself and not a negation of the character class To specify a character class which consists of only a caret you can use the pattern However this is overkill because a character class that contains only one character is equivalent to entering the character itself without the brackets Simple is better and EDIT is faster at matching a literal character than matching a character class of one Zero or More The asterisk is used with Regular Expressions ON to match zero Or more occurrences of the preceding character or character Match Character class For example the command F ABC matches the boxed items in the following sample text abc abcccccece acbc Figure 5 9 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F ABC 5 12 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions The asterisk affects only the preceding character or c
329. y exchanges all occurrences of the character string specified in a pattern This may not always be desirable For example a search for all occurrences of the word and would also locate the words band command and sand Regular expressions allows you to indicate that only the string specified is to be located or exchanged and not incidences of the string occurring within other strings This is done by delimiting the pattern string with two colons For example to exchange all occurrences of and with but excluding incidences of the string and within other character strings enter the exchange command X and but For more information and examples for Regular Expressions refer to Chapter 5 The following shortcuts can be used to locate a line with the specified pattern and execute a single command if they are used from the line where the search is to begin pattern lt cmmd gt pattern lt cmmd gt The first example finds the specified pattern by searching forward from the current pending line to the end of the file The second example locates the pattern by searching backwards from the current pending line to the beginning of the file For more information on the search and exchange commands and the pattern specifications and options available with them refer to the tutorial in Chapter 2 and the command descriptions in Chapter 4 of this manual For more information on advanced pattern specifications refer to Chapter 5 EDI
330. y table file CYCS2 does not build the table headers 5 32 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions sere b ru am i kalg Summary for amp 1 cache cycles size expansions executions d cache size q g lt 8 gt 0 9 S amp 1 d instruction expansions q g lt 8 gt 0 9 S amp 1 y d expanded instruction executions q g lt 8 gt 0 9 S amp 1 j d cycles q d total q g lt 8 gt 0 9 amp 1 EJ a 1 cycs a Figure 5 29 EDIT Command File CYCS1 Figure 5 29 illustrates the EDIT command file CYCS1 in its entirety The first step of building the required table is adding in the summary name The line to be extracted from a simulation results file is RU AM X 16 KALDE gt KALDE KAL54 The commands in the CYCS1 EDIT command file that extract the summary name are sere o ru am i kalg Summary for amp 1 The command SERE turns on the Regular Expressions option The command b ru am finds the line in the work file that contains the required summary name The last command in this group consists of three commands on one line The i command inserts a blank line before the title line The next command ka marks the line just inserted with the mark a The inserted line is marked because it is to be the first line appended to the summary table file This command does not change the work file position Finally the G command changes
331. yping the SE CD set control D command In either case display functions will be turned off Once CTRL D mode is enabled it stays enabled until it is disabled with another SE CD command While CTRL D mode is enabled screen mode back spaces are destructive and DEL or rub outs echo followed by a carriage return linefeed The edit display functions flag will be set to OFF when CTRL D mode is enabled and should be left off while CTRL D mode is being used To use the line drawing features of CTRL D mode your terminal must have the line drawing character set ROM installed and enabled usually it is enabled with the sequence ESC right parenthesis uppercase B If your terminal does not have the line drawing character set installed you can still use the Move and Copy features of the CTRL D mode Printing can be done on any printer that supports the HP line drawing sets When you enter a CTRL D during screen mode with CTRL D sub mode enabled EDIT responds by turning on an inverse video mark around the current cursor position It also saves the screen location of this point in an internal list of points Entering additional CTRL Ds displays additional inverse video marks on the screen and adds points to the points list These points become the arguments of the CTRL D mode commands Normally these points define a closed polygon around the area to be used by the CTRL D command When two consecutive points having different row and column a
332. zy xyZZy rtyu XyzzY abxyzzycd abcd dcba Figure 5 3 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy The only string that matches the pattern is the one that occurs at the beginning of the line The anchor metacharacter does not anchor the pattern search to the start of a line but rather to the start of the search window The search window is an EDIT option that enables you to define a horizontal window for pattern searches This option allows you to match patterns starting at any specific column not just column one To set a new search window the default is column 1 through column 256 use the SE WC n n command Set Window Column to column range To match the string XYZZY starting in column six enter note EDIT s system response on line two confirming the command se we 6 Search window columns WC 6 256 O ESOS This find command matches the boxed items in the following text abcd defg qwert Xyzzy asdf hgijkl vbnm XyZyy xyZZy rtyu XyzzY abxyzzycd abcd dcba Figure 5 4 Matches to the Regular Expressions Command F xyzzy with WC 6 For the first line that contains a match there is a space in column 5 and the text starts in column 6 The second match is a portion of a string but only the portion beginning in column 6 is matched 5 8 EDIT 1000 Regular Expressions The End Anchor Character Once a search window is set it remains in effect for all searches and exchanges until it is

EDIT/1000 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents